JP6104850B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to, for example, a slot machine. Specifically, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information , each of which can be identified, is provided. After the variable display unit is variably displayed, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit. The present invention also relates to a slot machine that can generate a prize according to the display result.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, special roles, and replaying roles. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the special role winning, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the winning of the re-gamer, it is possible to obtain a profit that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the bet number.

  In order for winning of each combination to occur, generally, it is a condition that a winning is made by an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). In addition, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery is aligned with the effective line, and the combination of symbols configuring the winning combination not selected in the internal lottery is not aligned with the effective line. Reel control is performed.

JP 2006-271864 A

The purpose of the present invention is to provide a slot machine capable of inspire expected sense.

The slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention includes:
A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
After displaying the variable display unit in a variable manner, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result,
A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow a prize to be generated;
Controlling the execution of games in a plurality of types of gaming states including a normal gaming state, an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a preparation gaming state until control to the advantageous gaming state, An advantageous amount that can be controlled to the advantageous gaming state is set as a termination condition of the advantageous gaming state, and a gaming state control means that consumes the advantageous amount and terminates the advantageous gaming state by satisfying the termination condition;
In the preparatory gaming state, when at least one of the transition conditions to the advantageous gaming state is satisfied, the advantageous amount can be increased by satisfying the specific condition, and the advantageous amount is increased. and end condition changing means for changing the set end condition of the advantageous gaming state by causing,
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
An operation procedure information notifying unit capable of notifying operation procedure information capable of specifying an operation procedure according to the predetermined determination result when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes a predetermined determination result in the preparatory gaming state ; Prepared,
The pre-determining means has a different determination mode depending on which one of the normal gaming state, the advantageous gaming state, and the preparatory gaming state is controlled, and the gaming value is not used by the player. Decide whether to allow a replay win to set the number of bets available for the next game,
The specific condition is a condition that is established when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific determination result.
In addition, you may provide the following structures .
( 1) By setting the number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result is derived to a variable display device capable of changing the display state, thereby completing one game. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated according to a display result of the variable display device,
Prior determination means (internal lottery processing) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived to the variable display device;
Derivation operation accepting means (stop switches 8L to 8R) for accepting an operation for deriving a display result from the variable display device;
Means for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation received by the derivation operation reception means, wherein the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined value; Result (winning for any of 9 winning combinations (1) to (9), winning for fall replay), an advantageous procedure determined in advance corresponding to the predetermined result (winning 9 When the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the procedure for generating a winning combination and the procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning), the operation is performed by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. Derivation control means (reel rotation) for controlling to derive an advantageous display result (combination of 9 sheets, combination of replays) more advantageous to the player than the display result to be derived when Processing, FIG. 18 (a) and reference),
Point granting means (see S1, S2, S10 in FIG. 22) for giving points when a predetermined granting condition (point granting condition) is established;
Storage means (RAM 91c) for storing point identifying information (given point total number) for identifying the granted points;
Notification conditions (FIG. 20 and FIG. 20) in which the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the amount of points (total number of points granted) specified from the point specifying information at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game (the lottery condition for the first AT lottery is established). 21 is set, and a notification period control means (first AT executed by the sub-control unit 91) that controls the notification period (AT) for notifying predetermined information (navigation effect) according to the notification condition is set. Lottery process, AT management process),
Result information for notifying the result information corresponding to the predetermined result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result on condition that the notification period (AT preparation mode, ART). Notification means (navigation effect execution processing executed by the sub-control unit 91);
As point information suggesting the amount of points awarded, accurate point information that can correctly identify the amount of points awarded, or a notification condition that is less advantageous to the player than the amount of points awarded is the notification. Point information notifying means (see S4, S6, and S8 in FIG. 22) for notifying inaccurate point information that can specify the amount of points set by the period control means.

  According to such a configuration, during the notification period during which the advantageous display result can be derived by intentionally operating the advantageous procedure when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a predetermined result, the point specifying information is used. Control is performed according to notification conditions set so that the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the amount of points specified. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the amount of points is set for a notification condition with a high degree of advantage.

  In addition, as point information that suggests the amount of points given, there are accurate point information that can correctly identify the amount of points given, or notification conditions that are less advantageous for the player than the amount of points given. Inaccurate point information that can specify the amount of points set by the notification period control means is notified. For this reason, the player has a sense of expectation that the amount of points for which a notification condition that is highly advantageous to the player is set may be given, rather than the amount of points specified from the point information. You can make it. As a result, it is possible to have a greater sense of expectation than the amount of points specified from the notified point information for being controlled during the notification period. In addition, even when the amount of points for which a notification condition having a relatively low degree of advantage for the player is set is specified from the notified point information, the notification has a higher degree of advantage for the player than the amount of the point. Since the amount of points for which conditions are set may actually be given, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for being controlled during the notification period.

(1-a) The notification period control means described above provides the notification condition so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the amount of points specified from the point specifying information is larger than when the amount of points is small. (See FIGS. 20 and 21)
The point information notifying means notifies the accurate point information that can correctly specify the amount of assigned points or the inaccurate point information that can specify the amount of points smaller than the amount of assigned points (FIG. 25). , See FIG. 26).

  In this case, the player can have a sense of expectation that a larger amount of points may be given than the amount of points specified from the point information. As a result, it is possible to have a greater sense of expectation than the amount of points specified from the notified point information for being controlled during the notification period. In addition, even when a relatively small amount of points is identified from the notified point information, since the amount of points larger than the amount of points may actually be given, Expectation to be controlled can be maintained.

(1-b) The notification period control means described above allows the notification condition so that the player is more advantageous when the amount of points specified from the point specifying information is smaller than when the amount of points is large. Set
The point information notifying means is for notifying accurate point information that can specify the amount of given points, or inaccurate point information that can specify the amount of points larger than the amount of given points. (Refer to Modification (I)).

  In this case, the player can have a sense of expectation that the amount of points actually given may be smaller than the amount of points specified from the point information. As a result, it is possible to have a greater sense of expectation than the amount of points specified from the notified point information for being controlled during the notification period. In addition, even when a relatively large amount of points is specified from the notified point information, the amount of points actually given may be less than the amount of points, so control is performed during the notification period. Can maintain a sense of expectation for what is being done.

  (1-c) The point information notifying means is accurate point information that can correctly specify the amount of the given points on the condition that the points are given by the point giving means when the grant conditions are satisfied. Alternatively, even if the notification condition that is less advantageous for the player than the amount of points given is to notify inaccurate point information that can specify the amount of points set by the notification period control means Good.

  In this case, the expectation to be controlled during the notification period can be changed stepwise according to the amount of points specified from the point information notified each time points are given by the point granting means. it can. In addition, it is possible to add an interest that the player himself calculates and stores the total amount of points up to now from the point information notified each time points are given by the point giving means.

  (1-d) When the point information notifying unit is awarded a point by the point granting unit with the establishment of the granting condition, the point information notifying unit determines the amount of the given correct point until the granting condition is met. Point information that can specify the total amount added to the amount of points specified from the notified point information, or a notification condition that is less advantageous to the player than the amount of the given points is provided by the notification period control means You may alert | report the point information which can identify | isolate the total amount which added the amount of inaccurate points set to the amount of points specified from the point information alert | reported until the said grant conditions were satisfied.

  In this case, in accordance with the total amount of points specified from the point information notified each time points are given by the point giving means, the expectation for being controlled during the notification period is changed stepwise. Can do. In addition, the player can easily recognize the total amount of the notified points.

  (1-e) The notification condition may be a condition related to the control for the notification period. The notification condition may be, for example, a condition related to whether or not to start the notification period. More specifically, the notification condition relating to whether or not to start the notification period is (a) determined to control to the notification period in the slot machine that controls to the notification period on condition that it is determined to control to the notification period. (I) a ratio for determining the number of games reached until the control to the notification period is started in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on condition that the number of games reached has reached the determined number of reached games; (C) Notification in the slot machine that controls during the notification period on condition that the number of advantageous procedures from which the advantageous display result has been derived when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes a predetermined result has reached the determined number of arrivals. It may be a ratio that determines the number of times of arrival until the control to the period is started (see the modification (18)).

  In the case of (a) above, the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, the more points are provided). The means sets notification conditions that are determined to be controlled during the notification period at a high rate (see, for example, the winning rate of “0-2” and the winning rate of “6-9” in FIG. 20). In the case of (b), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, the more points are provided). The means sets a notification condition for determining a smaller number of reached games at a high rate (see Modification (18)). In the case of the above (c), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a smaller number of arrivals at a high rate (see Modification (18)).

  Further, the notification condition may be, for example, a condition related to a period controlled in the notification period. More specifically, the notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period is (d) control on the notification period on condition that the number of games digested in the notification period has reached the determined end game number. The ratio of determining the number of end games in the slot machine to be ended, (e) The end lottery is executed according to the end probability determined in advance in the notification period, and the control to the notification period is performed on condition that the winning in the end lottery is won. The ratio for determining the termination probability in the slot machine to be terminated, (f) The notification on condition that the determination result of the predetermination means becomes a predetermined result in the notification period and the corresponding result information has been notified reaches the specified number of times. The ratio may be a ratio for determining the specified number of times in the slot machine that finishes controlling the period (see the modification (18)).

  In the case of (d), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a larger number of finished games at a high rate (for example, see a winning rate of “0-2” and a winning rate of “6-9” in FIG. 20). In the case of the above (e), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a lower end probability at a high rate (see Modification (18)). In the case of (f), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, the more points are provided). A means sets the alerting | reporting conditions which determine the more specified frequency | count with a high ratio (refer modification (18)).

  In addition, the notification condition is, for example, (g) a slot in which whether or not to notify corresponding result information when the determination result of the pre-determining means becomes a predetermined result during the notification period, and which is notified when winning is determined. It may be the ratio that determines the winning probability in the machine. In the case of the above (ki), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a higher winning probability at a high rate (see Modification (18)).

  The notification condition may be any of the above (a) to (ki), or may be selectively combined among the above (a) to (ki). Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (a) to (ki) or selectively combined, the amount of points specified from the point specifying information is higher as the player is more advantageous (for example, Since the notification condition is set so that the degree of advantage for the player becomes higher as the number of points increases, the player can advance the game while expecting it, and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the slot machine that adopts (b) or (c) as the notification condition, it can be derived when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes a specific result among the predetermined results according to the notification condition. When a predetermined end display result is derived, control is performed during an out-of-period notification enabling period for notifying the result information corresponding to the specific result, except for the notification period of the period controlled to the gaming state that can be in the normal state A non-period notification possible period control means,
Provided with a non-period notification means for notifying the result information corresponding to the specified result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specified result on condition that the notification period is outside the period. In this case, the notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period may further include technical matters described below.

  As notification conditions related to whether or not to start the notification period, (h) notification outside the period can be made on condition that the number of games digested in the out-of-period notification period has reached the determined number of out-of-period end games Execute out-of-period end lottery according to the ratio of determining the out-of-period end game in the slot machine that ends the control to the period, and the predetermined out-of-period end probability in the out-of-period notification possible period. The ratio of determining the end-of-period end probability in the slot machine that finishes the control to the out-of-period notification period on condition that the lottery has been won, As a condition that the number of times the corresponding result information has been notified has reached the specified number of times outside the period, the control to end the control period outside the period is terminated. Good rate, be an determining the period out prescribed number of times in Ttomashin (see Modification (19)).

  In the case of the above (ku), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases as the degree of advantage for the player increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a larger number of out-of-period end games at a high rate (see Modification (19)). In the case of the above (K), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a lower out-of-period termination probability at a high rate (see Modification (19)). In the case of (co), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, the more points there are). The means sets a notification condition for determining a larger number of out-of-period prescribed times at a high rate (see Modification (19)).

  In addition, the notification condition is, for example, lottery whether or not to notify corresponding result information when the determination result of the pre-determining means becomes a specific result in the (non-) notifiable period, and notifies when winning. In the slot machine, the ratio for determining the winning probability may be used. In the case of (S), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, the more points are provided). The means sets a notification condition for determining a higher winning probability at a high rate (see Modification (19)).

  The notification condition in the slot machine including the non-period notification possible period control means and the non-period notification means may be any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa), Moreover, what was selectively combined among said (a)-(ki) and said (ku)-(sa) may be sufficient. Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (A) to (K) and the above (K) to (S), or selectively combined, the amount of points specified from the point specifying information is a game. Since the notification condition is set so that the higher the degree of advantage for the player (for example, the more points), the higher the degree of advantage for the player, the player can proceed with the game with a sense of expectation. Can improve the interest of

  (1-f) When the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined result, and the operation is received by the derivation operation reception means in an advantageous procedure determined in advance corresponding to the predetermined result The advantageous display result derived in (i) is more than the display result (hereinafter also referred to as the non-advantageous display result) derived when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting unit in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. ) A point that a player acquires a lot of game value (medals), (ii) a point that is controlled in a game state advantageous in the game after the game, or (iii) a game state that is disadvantageous in the game after the game The display result may be a display result that increases the degree of advantage for the player at least at any point that is not controlled (see Modification (O)).

  Furthermore, when the procedure for deriving the advantageous display result at the three points (i) to (iii) is different, the three points (i) to (iii) may be comprehensively determined.

  In other words, the advantage display result is more advantageous for the player than the non-advantage display result is that the game value acquired by the player in the game in which the determination result of the predetermining means is a predetermined result is more than the advantage display result. There are more non-advantageous display results, and even if a loss occurs due to the advantageous display results compared to the non-advantageous display results, it becomes an advantageous display result and is controlled to an advantageous gaming state thereafter. As a result, it is a case where the player acquires a gaming value equal to or greater than the loss compared to the case where the gaming state is not controlled to be advantageous.

  Further, the advantage display result is more advantageous for the player than the non-advantage display result. The game value acquired by the player in the game in which the determination result of the predetermining means is a predetermined result is higher than the advantage display result. There are more non-advantageous display results, and even if there is a loss due to the advantageous display results compared to the non-advantageous display results, control to an unfavorable gaming state without resulting in non-advantageous display results As a result, the player obtains a gaming value that is greater than or equal to the loss compared to when the gaming state is controlled to be disadvantageous.

  In addition, the advantage display result is more advantageous to the player than the non-advantageous display result is that the player after the non-advantageous display result is more advantageous than the game state after the advantageous display result. The game value that the player acquires in the game is large even if there is a loss after the advantageous display result as compared to the non-advantageous display result. This is a case where the player obtains a game value in the game that is equal to or more than the loss that will occur after that in comparison with the case where the non-advantageous display result is greater than the non-advantageous display result.

  Further, the derivation control means described above is operated by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure determined in advance corresponding to the predetermined result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a predetermined result. If it is accepted, if the control for deriving the display result is greater than that when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure, a control with a higher degree of advantage for the player is performed. Good (see modification (O)).

  In addition, the derivation control means performs control for deriving an advantageous display result when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure, and the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It is also possible to perform control so that the advantageous display result is not derived at the time.

  In addition, the derivation control means performs control so that the non-advantageous display result is not derived when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the advantageous procedure, and the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It is also possible to perform a control for deriving a non-advantageous display result when given.

  Further, the derivation control means derives an advantageous display result when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure than when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. You may control so that a ratio may become high.

  In addition, the above derivation control means derives a non-advantageous display result when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure than when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It is also possible to perform control so that the ratio is lower.

More specifically, the following control may be performed.
(1-f-1) When the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, the non-advantageous display result is controlled, and the operation is accepted in the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result. Control may be made to derive an advantageous display result to which more game values (medals) are given (paid out) than when the non-advantageous display result is derived (variation (O-1)) reference). As a result, in a game in which the determination result of the pre-decision means is a predetermined result, the game value that the player obtains when operated by an advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases in terms of increase in the number of players.

    (1-f-2) When an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, control is performed to derive a non-advantageous display result, and the operation is accepted in an advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result. Control may be performed to derive an advantageous display result that is more advantageous to the player than the state after the non-advantageous display result is derived (see Modification (O-2)). .

More specifically, for example, in a predetermined gaming state, when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, control is performed to derive a non-advantageous display result that does not involve a transition of the gaming state. When an operation is accepted according to an advantageous procedure corresponding to a predetermined result, an advantageous display result with a transition to a gaming state (for example, RT) more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state is derived. It is also possible to perform control (see Modification (O-2)). It should be noted that, in this case, the game is worth the player to come to the non-advantageous display results have been derived to win, does not matter the size of the gaming value the player is earned when advantageous display results have been derived. As a result, apart from the degree of advantage in the game in which the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes a predetermined result, the time when operated by the advantageous procedure is more appropriate than when the operation is operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure In the game after the game, it can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is high in that the game state is controlled to be advantageous.

In addition, for example, in a predetermined gaming state, when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, the gaming state (for example, disadvantageous RT) is more disadvantageous for the player than the predetermined gaming state. Control to derive non-advantageous display results with transition, and control to derive advantageous display results without transition of gaming state when an operation is accepted by an advantageous procedure corresponding to a predetermined result (See Modification (O-2)). In this case also, the game value player to come to non-beneficial display result is derived is acquired is not limited size of the game value the player is earned when advantageously display result was derived. As a result, apart from the degree of advantage in the game in which the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes a predetermined result, the time when operated by the advantageous procedure is more appropriate than when the operation is operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is high in that it is not controlled to a disadvantageous gaming state in the game after the game.

    (1-f-3) When the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, control is performed to derive the advantageous display result at a predetermined non-advantage rate, and the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result When the operation is accepted, control for deriving an advantageous display result at a predetermined advantageous rate higher than a predetermined non-advantageous rate may be performed (see Modification (O-3)). The advantageous display results may be the advantageous display results indicated by (1-f-1) and (1-f-2). As a result, when the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes a predetermined result, the player is acquired at a higher rate when operated by the advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. The degree of advantage for the player in that at least one of the following points increases the gaming value, is controlled to an advantageous gaming state in the game after the game, or is not controlled to an unfavorable gaming state in the game after the game Can be said to be high.

  Further, when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, a control for deriving a winning display result accompanied with a predetermined non-advantageous amount of game value given at a predetermined non-advantageous ratio is performed. Performing a control for deriving a winning display result accompanied by a predetermined advantageous amount of game value given at a predetermined advantageous rate when an operation is accepted by an advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result; and Non-advantageous proportion, non-advantageous amount, advantageous proportion, and advantageous amount may satisfy the relationship of (advantageous proportion) × (advantageous amount)> (non-advantageous proportion) × (non-advantageous amount) (variation (O -3)). As a result, when the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes a predetermined result, the game value obtained by the player is greater when operated by the advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases in that the expected value of the amount increases.

  (1-g) The notification period control means described above is a length (navigation stock number, predetermined game number) uniquely specified from the amount of points specified from the point specifying information at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game. It may be controlled to a notification period in which predetermined information is notified over a period of digestion, a period in which navigation effects are executed a predetermined number of times, and the like (see Modification (P)). For example, the notification period control means may control the notification period longer when the amount of points specified from the point specifying information is larger than when the amount of points specified is small, or for the point specifying Control may be performed for the notification period longer when the amount of points specified from the information is smaller than when the amount of points is large. Even when configured in this way, the same effects as described above are obtained.

(2) The above-mentioned granting condition is a predetermined lottery lottery (a predetermined lottery executed when a melon is won in a case other than a bonus and in a high probability state, and executed when a melon is won during a bonus. Is established when the winner is selected (see FIGS. 23A and 23B),
The notification period control means sets a notification condition so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the amount of points given is larger than when the amount of points is small (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
Even when the point specifying information is stored in response to the fact that the point specifying information is stored in response to the fact that the points are awarded in the point giving lottery (S2 in FIG. 22), the point information notifying means The same control as when no points were awarded and points were awarded (when it is decided not to notify in S4 and S6 in FIG. 22, NO is determined in S7 and S8 and S9 are not performed). Thus, point information that can specify the amount of points smaller than the amount of given points is notified (see FIG. 22).

  According to such a configuration, even when the same control as when no points are given is performed, the player actually has a sense of expectation that the points are awarded in the point giving lottery. And can enhance the fun of the game.

  The same control as when no points were awarded in the point granting lottery means that the point information is obtained due to the establishment of the present granting conditions when the configuration of (1-c) is provided. This refers to control that does not notify, and in the case of having the configuration of (1-d) above, the point information that can specify the amount of points specified from the point information that is notified until the present grant condition is satisfied is continuously notified. Control to do.

(2 ′) The above-mentioned granting condition is a predetermined point granting lottery (a predetermined lottery executed when a melon is won in a state other than a bonus and in a high probability state, executed when a melon is won during a bonus. Established when the winning lottery is performed (see FIGS. 23A and 23B),
The notification period control means sets the notification condition so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the amount of given points is smaller than when the amount of points is large,
Even if the point information notifying means does not win in the point giving lottery and no points are given, by performing the same control as in the case of winning points in the point giving lottery, The point information that can specify the amount of the more points may be notified (see Modification (I)).

  According to such a configuration, even when the same control as when the points are given is performed, the player has a sense of expectation that the points are not actually awarded in the point giving lottery and the points are not given. And can enhance the fun of the game.

  In addition, in the point grant lottery, the same control as when the winning point is awarded means that the point information corresponding to a predetermined amount of points is provided regardless of the establishment of the grant condition when the configuration of (1-c) is provided. This refers to the control to notify, and when the configuration of (1-d) is provided, it is possible to specify point information that can specify the total amount obtained by adding a predetermined amount of points to the amount of points specified from the already notified point information This is a control to update to point information.

(3) The point giving means determines the number of points to be given (see S2 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24),
The notification period control means sets a notification condition so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the amount of points given is larger than when the amount of points is small (see FIGS. 20 and 21).
The point information notifying means performs the same control as when the amount of points smaller than the amount of points to be given is given even when the point specifying information is stored according to the amount of points to be given. (When S4 and S6 in FIG. 22 determine that the number of notification points is small, the process of S8 is performed as if the determined points were given), so that the amount of given points is larger than the given points. Point information capable of specifying a small amount of points is reported (see FIG. 22).

  According to such a configuration, even when the same control is performed as when only a small number of points are given, the player can have a sense of expectation that more points are actually given. Can improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the same control as when the amount of points less than the amount of points to be granted is given is given due to the establishment of the present grant condition when the configuration of (1-c) is provided. This refers to control for notifying point information that can specify the amount of points smaller than the amount of points. When the configuration of (1-d) is provided, it is specified from the point information that has been notified until the present grant condition is satisfied. This refers to control for informing point information capable of specifying the total amount obtained by adding the amount of points to the amount of points added to the amount of points less than the amount of points granted due to the establishment of the current granting condition.

(3 ′) The point giving means determines the number of points to be given (see S2 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24),
The notification period control means sets the notification condition so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the amount of given points is smaller than when the amount of points is large,
The point information notification means performs the same control as when a point amount larger than the point amount is given even when the point specifying information is stored according to the point amount to be given. By this, you may alert | report the point information which can specify the amount of points larger than the amount of the provided points (refer modification (I)).

  According to such a configuration, even when the same control is performed as when many points are awarded, the player has a sense of expectation that less points or points are not actually given. And can improve the fun of the game.

  Note that the same control as when the amount of points greater than the amount of points given is granted is given due to the establishment of the present granting condition when the configuration of (1-c) is provided. Control for notifying the point information that can specify the amount of points larger than the amount of points obtained, and in the case of having the configuration of (1-d) above, from the point information notified until the present grant condition is satisfied. This refers to control for notifying point information that can specify a total amount obtained by adding a point amount greater than the amount of points given due to the establishment of the current granting condition to the amount of specified points.

  (4) The granting condition can be satisfied in a predetermined point acquirable period (during bonus, high probability state) from a predetermined start opportunity (bonus start, bonus end, melon winning) until a plurality of games are consumed (FIG. 23). (See (b)).

  According to such a configuration, a sense of expectation for shifting to the point acquirable period can be given.

(5) Special gaming state control means for controlling to a special gaming state (bonus) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined normal state when a special winning (big bonus, regular bonus) occurs among the plurality of types of winnings (A process for controlling a bonus corresponding to when a big bonus or a regular bonus is won)
The point acquirable period includes a period in which the special gaming state is controlled.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to have a greater expectation for being controlled to the special game state, and to improve the interest of the game during the special game state.

(6) Special gaming state control means (when a big bonus or a regular bonus is won) that controls to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined normal state when a special winning among the plurality of types of winnings occurs Process to control the bonus corresponding to)
Preparation state control means for controlling to a predetermined preparation state when the special gaming state ends (processing for controlling to the preparation mode after the bonus ends);
Advantageous state control means for controlling the player to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and the ready state when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied in the ready state (when the special event stops in the preparation mode) Processing for controlling to RT), and
On the condition that the determination result of the pre-determining means in the preparation state or the advantageous state is a specific result (at the time of replay + falling replay winning, replay + falling replay + BAR replay winning) among the predetermined results When an end display result (falling replay) that can be derived by the derivation control means is derived, normal state control means for controlling to the normal state (processing for controlling to the normal gaming state when the falling replay wins); With
The derivation control means is when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result, and when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure corresponding to the specific result, the ending control means Control is performed to derive a display result different from the display result as the advantageous display result, and when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting unit in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the specific result, the end display result is derived. Control (see FIG. 18A),
The result information notifying means determines that the determination result of the prior determining means is the specified condition on condition that it is the notification period (AT preparation mode, ART) of the period controlled to the preparation state or the advantageous state. When the result is obtained, the result information corresponding to the specific result (navigation effect according to the type of replay that is simultaneously won at the time of falling replay win) is notified (navigation effect executed by the sub-control unit 91) Execution process).

  According to such a configuration, after the special gaming state is finished, it is controlled to the ready state, and if the advantageous condition is satisfied in the ready state, the advantageous state is controlled, and the end display result is derived in the ready state. Then, the normal state is controlled. For this reason, when the advantageous condition is established before the end display result is derived in the preparation state after the end of the special gaming state, the advantageous state is controlled.

  The end display result that prevents the transition from the ready state to the advantageous state is not derived when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specific result, and is operated in the advantageous procedure corresponding to the specific result, Derived when operated in different procedures.

  Further, in the notification period of the period controlled to the preparation state, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result, result information corresponding to the specific result is notified.

  As described above, the gaming state in the previous stage of the advantageous state is controlled to the ready state, and the advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous condition is satisfied before the end display result is derived in the ready state. In this preparatory state, when controlled during the notification period, by operating in an advantageous procedure based on the result information corresponding to the specific result to be notified, while avoiding the intentionally derived end display result, The game can proceed while waiting for the favorable conditions to be established. On the other hand, when the notification period is not controlled even in the preparation state, the result information corresponding to the specific result is not notified by the notification means, so that it is not possible to avoid intentionally deriving the end display result. There is an increased possibility that the end display result is derived before the advantageous condition is satisfied and the normal state is controlled without being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to give a clear degree of advantage to the player depending on whether or not it is controlled during the notification period in the preparation state that is the pre-stage of the advantageous state, and the expectation for being controlled during the notification period is effective. And can enhance the interest of the game.

  Similarly, even in the advantageous state, during the notification period, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a specific result, result information corresponding to the specific result is notified. For this reason, in the notification period among the periods controlled to be in an advantageous state, by operating in an advantageous procedure based on the notified result information, the end display result is intentionally avoided and Control can be continued in an advantageous state. On the other hand, it is not possible to avoid intentionally deriving the end display result during periods other than the notification period among the periods controlled to the advantageous state, and the end display result is derived and controlled to the normal state. The possibility that it will end up increases. As a result, it is possible to give a clear degree of advantage to the player depending on whether or not it is controlled during the notification period in the advantageous state, effectively increasing the expectation for being controlled during the notification period, and enhancing the interest of the game. Can be improved.

  The slot machine described above may be a slot machine further provided with a configuration listed below.

(A) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for performing production control based on the received control information (command),
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing control information (commands) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (commands) stored in the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91) in a predetermined priority order. Including
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
Production control information storage means (reception buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the received control information (command);
Performing an effect to read control information (commands) stored in the effect control information storage means (reception buffer) in the order in which they are stored and to perform an effect in accordance with the read control information (command) Control means,
The effect control information storage means (reception buffer) has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer).

  According to such a configuration, the effect control information storage means has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means. In this way, when performing an operation test by connecting the game control means for operation test to the effect control means in order to check whether the effect control means operates normally during development or before shipment, The problem that the efficiency of the test cannot be sufficiently increased can be solved. That is, even when control information is continuously transmitted from the game control means for operation test, the number of control information that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval are assumed to be the storage area of the game control information storage means, that is, a normal game. Thus, it is possible to continuously transmit a large amount of control information up to the limit of the storage area of the production control information storage means without being limited according to the number of storage areas allocated by a number that does not overflow. Therefore, the efficiency of the operation test can be effectively increased.

(B) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the received control information (command);
A predetermined first frame (housing 1a);
A second frame (front door 1b) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the first frame (housing 1a);
An open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) for detecting the open / close state of the second frame (front door 1b);
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) for storing control information (command) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (command) stored in the control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91);
Open / close state detection monitoring means for monitoring a detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25),
When the open / closed state detection monitoring unit detects a change in the detection state of the open / closed state detection unit (door open detection switch 25) (ON to OFF or OFF to ON), the control information generation unit Open / close state detection information generating means for generating open / close state detection information (door command) indicating the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) as the control information (command),
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
Opening for determining whether or not the second frame (front door 1b) is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) indicated by the open / close state detection information (door command). A determination means;
An opening notifying means for notifying the opening of the second frame (front door 1b) when the opening determining means determines that the second frame (front door 1b) is open.

  According to such a configuration, it is often necessary to open the second frame in order to perform an illegal act against the slot machine, but when the second frame is opened, the fact is notified. Therefore, fraud against the slot machine can be effectively prevented. Further, the game control means monitors the detection state of the opening / closing state detection means, and when there is a change in the detection state, the opening / closing state detection information indicating the detection state after the change is used as control information to the effect control means. By only transmitting, the effect control means determines whether or not the second frame is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means indicated by the open / close state detection information transmitted from the game control means, and the determination The opening of the second frame can be notified based on the result. Therefore, the game control means does not need to determine whether or not the second frame is open from the detection state of the open / close state detection means when notifying the opening of the second frame. Control load can be reduced.

(C) It is determined whether an abnormality (for example, a door opening error, a setting change error, a closing error, a payout error, etc.) has occurred, and a signal for specifying the type of the abnormality that has occurred is transmitted in a parallel signal system. Signal transmission means (main control unit 41);
Conversion output means (external output board 1000, parallel serial) having an output unit for converting the signal from the signal transmission means into a serial signal system capable of specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred and outputting the same to the outside of the slot machine Conversion circuit 1002).

  According to such a configuration, a signal for specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred can be output from one output unit, and a plurality of signals can be output by providing an output unit for each type of abnormality as in the past. It is not necessary to provide more output units than necessary as compared with output from the unit.

(D) derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving the display result of the variable display device;
Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation procedure of the derivation operation means;
A game value giving means (payout process) for giving a predetermined amount of game value to a player when an award of a plurality of types of winnings occurs;
The notification means can specify a procedure (including operation timing, operation order, etc.) for deriving a winning that is allowed to be generated by the prior determination means, on condition that the notification means is controlled. Perform procedure notification control to notify the player of such information,
The advantageous state control means does not end the existence state by allowing the occurrence of the special prize in the advantageous state,
The notification means performs the procedure notification control from the predetermined timing after being controlled to the advantageous state until the set notification period (number of AT continuing games during AT) elapses,
In the advantageous state, the expected value of the amount of gaming value given by the gaming value granting means per game in the advantageous state is a procedure specified from the information notified by the procedure notification means when it is within the notification period. When the derivation operation means is operated, the amount of game value used for setting the bet number is increased, and when it is outside the notification period, the amount of game value used for setting the bet number is larger. (Refer to Modification (14)).

  According to such a configuration, the expected value of the amount of gaming value given when the player is in an advantageous state and within the notification period can be obtained by operating the bet number by operating the procedure specified from the notified information. More than the amount of gaming value used for setting. Further, the advantageous state continues at least as long as no special prize is generated. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the advantageous state ends before the notification period elapses when the player performs a stop operation in a procedure that does not lead to the special winning. As a result, the player does not generate a special prize and performs a stop operation in accordance with the procedure specified from the notified information, so that the player can use the amount of the game to be given when the player is in an advantageous state and within the notification period. Value can be acquired. In addition, after the notification period has elapsed, it is possible to add interest such as generating a special prize and controlling the game to a special game state, thereby improving the fun of the game.

(E) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the received control information (command);
Production operation means (for example, a touch panel, various switches) provided separately from game operation means (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) operated when the player performs operations related to the progress of the game. )
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
When the control information for test (inspection command) of the operation means for production (touch panel) is received, the operation means inspection means for production for performing the inspection of the detection status of the operation of the operation means for production (touch panel);
After receiving the test control information (inspection command) of the production operation means (touch panel), control based on reception of new control information (command) until the operation of the production operation means (touch panel) is detected. And during-inspection control prohibition means to be prohibited.

  According to such a configuration, in order to inspect whether or not the performance control means operates normally during development or before shipment, the game control means for operation test is connected to the performance control means and the operation test is performed. In this case, when the production control means receives the test control information for the production operation means, control based on reception of new control information is prohibited until the operation of the production operation means is detected thereafter. Therefore, unless the detection of the operation detection state of the effect operation means is performed, the operation does not shift to the operation based on reception of new control information. For example, the effect control means receives the test control information of the effect operation means. After that, even when the next test control information is newly transmitted by mistake before the operation of the production operation means is detected, the detection of the operation detection status of the production operation means can be normally performed.

  Note that the control information may be information indicating the control state of the game control means, or information indicating designation or instruction of effect control. In addition, the fact that the in-inspection control prohibiting means prohibits control based on reception of new control information may not be reception of new control information itself, or may be received but received new control information. Control based on the above may not be performed.

(F) In the slot machine of (e), the effect operating means detects an operation within a predetermined area based on detection states of a plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) and specifies the operated position. Including touch panel
When the detection time of one of the plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) exceeds a predetermined time, the production control means (sub control unit 91) exceeds the predetermined time. Abnormal sensor invalidating means for invalidating detection of the sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the detection time of any sensor exceeds a predetermined time, the detection of that sensor is invalidated, so even if some sensors fail, only the failed sensor Since it is invalidated, it is possible to prevent the touch panel from becoming unusable even though the player's operation can be detected by a normal sensor.

  The anomaly sensor invalidation means may invalidate the detection of the sensor whose detection time exceeds a predetermined time, and thereafter not use the invalidated sensor, or periodically invalidate the sensor. The status may be checked and the invalidation may be canceled when the normal status (non-detection status) is confirmed, or the status is invalidated when the normal status is confirmed upon restart. May be canceled.

  (G) a carry-over means for carrying over the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize until the special prize is generated, and a prize that allows the next game to be played without using the gaming value is in the normal state; If the predetermination means decides to allow the occurrence of the special prize (bonus) after the advantageous state (see RT etc.) for performing the control to be derived with a higher probability than when You may comprise so that the said advantageous state may be complete | finished when the said special prize is generated, or when the said completion | finish display result is derived | led-out, without ending the said advantageous state (refer modification (14)).

  According to such a configuration, even if it is determined that the occurrence of a special prize is permitted after the advantageous state is started, if the special prize permitted by the determination does not occur, the advantageous state is determined according to the determination. Without being terminated, it is possible to continue control in the advantageous state until the termination display result is derived. For this reason, even if it is determined that the special winning is permitted in the advantageous state, the advantageous state can be continued unless the special winning allowed by the determination is generated, and the special winning is allowed. Compared with the conventional slot machine in which the advantageous state is ended by doing so, the player is not given a sense of loss when controlled to the advantageous state. In addition, since the decision to allow the occurrence of a special prize is carried over after the next game by the carryover means, it has been decided to allow the occurrence of a special prize while being controlled in an advantageous state. It can make you expect.

(H) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to a determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. According to the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the generation of a specific general winning (orange, plum) among the general winnings (small role, replaying role) is permitted, and a combination of symbols (orange-orange-) for generating the specific general winning When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) constituting orange, plum-plum-plum) can be pulled in , A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) is derived. It is determined that the specific general winning award (orange, plum) is allowed to occur, and the specific general winning symbol (oren) is determined. , Plum) when the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing other than the timing at which it can be pulled (outside the pulling range), any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) Control that does not derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general prize,
The specified general winning symbol (orange, plum) does not stop on any winning line in the variable display area (reserved reel) for which the display result has already been derived, and is still displayed in one or more variable display areas In a state where the result is not derived (a state where any reel is changing), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is displayed for the variable display area (the reel being changed) for which the display result is not yet derived. When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within a pull-in range) that can be pulled in, any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) is won. You may comprise so that the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) may be derived | led-out on top (refer modification (13-1)).

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to determine whether the winning prize was missed or not. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, the specific general winning symbol is not stopped in any winning line in the variable display area in which the display result has already been derived, and one or more variable Even in a state where the display result has not yet been derived in the display area, that is, in a state where it is not possible to derive a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize that has already been allowed, leaving a variable display area being fluctuating, If the stop operation means is operated at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn for the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is derived on one of the multiple winning lines, so It is decided to allow the occurrence of general winnings, and the combination of symbols to generate the already allowed specific general winnings is derived while leaving the variable display area being changed. Depending on whether a particular regular winning symbols are derived can be not state an even also on one winning line making, it can be easily determined whether or not the missed certain regular winning.

(I) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to a determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. According to the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the generation of a specific general winning (orange, plum) among the general winnings (small role, replaying role) is permitted, and a combination of symbols (orange-orange-) for generating the specific general winning When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) constituting orange, plum-plum-plum) can be pulled in , A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) is derived. It is determined that the specific general winning award (orange, plum) is allowed to occur, and the specific general winning symbol (oren) is determined. , Plum) when the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing other than the timing at which it can be pulled (outside the pulling range), any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) Control that does not derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general prize,
Among the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) for which display results have already been derived, one or more variable display areas (stopped reels) include the plurality of specific general winning symbols (orange, plum). Is stopped on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6), and the remaining of the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) from which the display result has already been derived In the variable display area (stopped reel), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is not stopped on the one winning line, and the display result is not yet derived in one or more variable display areas. In the absence state (the state where any reel is changing), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is drawn for the variable display area (the changing reel) for which the display result has not yet been derived. When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) that can be inserted, the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is derived on the one winning line. You may comprise so that control may be performed (refer modification (13-1)).

  According to such a configuration, in the conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to determine whether the winning prize was missed or not. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, and one or more variable display areas of two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived have any one of the specific general winning symbols. Of the two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived, and the specific variable pattern is not stopped on the single winning line in the remaining variable display areas. In addition, the display result has not been derived yet in one or more variable display areas, that is, the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings with the variable display area being changed cannot be derived. Even if the stop operation means is operated at a timing at which the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is already stopped on the one winning line. Since the fixed general winning symbol is derived, it is determined that the generation of the specific general winning is allowed, and the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winning is generated with the variable display area being changed. Even if it is not possible, it can be easily determined whether or not a specific general prize has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general prize symbol is derived on one winning line.

  Further, the specific general winning symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, it is preferable to include a notification means for notifying the possibility that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted. If it is informed that there is a possibility that the generation of the specific general winnings is permitted at the stage where the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings cannot be derived, the remaining variable display area Operate the stop operation means at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in, and the specific general winning symbol is derived on any one of the plurality of winning lines, or the specific general winning symbol has already stopped. It is possible to determine whether or not a specific general winning symbol has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general winning symbol is derived on one winning line. Prize in some cases more than one, whether the missed any particular regular winning can be accurately determined.

(J) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to a determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. According to the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
The derivation control means includes
The plurality of variable display areas as a display result in response to the determination that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum) among the general prizes (small role, re-playing role) is determined. Design for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2) or the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) Control to derive a combination of (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum),
The pre-determining means includes
First determination (orange, plum) to determine that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and the occurrence of a special general prize different from the specific general prize A second determination (orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2)), which simultaneously determines the fact that the specific general prize is allowed and the special prize is allowed 3 (Orange + BB (1), Plum + BB (2)), to allow the occurrence of the specific general prize, to allow the occurrence of the special general prize, and to allow the occurrence of the special prize simultaneously It is possible to make a fourth decision to decide (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum +1 (2) + BB (2))
The third decision occupying the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision (orange, plum) and the probability of making the third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) is made. And the probability that the second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2)) and the fourth decision (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum + 1) And the ratio of the probability of the fourth determination occupying the total probability of the sheet (2) + BB (2)) and the first to fourth determinations with different probabilities,
The derivation control means includes
The first pay line (winning line) is established when the first condition that the first decision (orange, plum) or the third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) is satisfied. A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning in the line L1, L2) at a higher rate than the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) Control to derive
The second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum + 1 sheet (2)) or the fourth determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + BB (2)) When the second condition made is satisfied, the specific general prize is given to the second pay line (win line L3, L4) at a higher rate than the first pay line (win line L1, L2). You may comprise so that the control which derives the combination (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating may be performed (refer modification (13-2)).

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, it is possible to win a small role alone, a small role and a special role at the same time. It is possible to expect a special role to be won according to the stop mode of the reel by making the stop control used at the time of simultaneous winning of the Since the stop mode at the time of simultaneous winning of special roles is different, it can be determined from the player whether or not the special role is won according to the stop mode, so if the special role is not won The problem that expectation is lost can be solved. That is, when the first determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived, and the second determination or When the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the third determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the fourth determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the third decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the third decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the fourth decision Since the ratio of the probability of the fourth determination to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that a special winning is permitted by the winning line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special prizes may be allowed to occur, but whether or not special prizes are allowed from the prize line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize is derived. It is impossible to discriminate, and the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is lost regardless of which winning line the symbol combination for generating a specific general winning is derived. It won't be lost.

(K) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for controlling the variable display device to derive the display result according to the determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. According to the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
The derivation control means includes
The plurality of variable display areas as a display result in response to the determination that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum) among the general prizes (small role, re-playing role) is determined. Design for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2) or the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) Control to derive the combination of (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum),
The pre-determining means includes
First determination (orange, plum) to determine that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and the occurrence of a special general prize different from the specific general prize A second determination (orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2)), which simultaneously determines the fact that the specific general prize is allowed and the special prize is allowed 3 (Orange + BB (1), Plum + BB (2)), to allow the occurrence of the specific general prize, to allow the occurrence of the special general prize, and to allow the occurrence of the special prize simultaneously It is possible to make a fourth decision to decide (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum +1 (2) + BB (2))
The sum of the probability of making the first decision (orange, plum) and the probability of making the fourth decision (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 (2) + BB (2)) The ratio of the probability of making the fourth decision in the probability, the probability of making the second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2)) and the third decision (orange + BB ( 1), the first to fourth determinations are performed with different probabilities of the ratio of the probability of the third determination occupying the total probability of the plum + BB (2));
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition in which the first determination (orange, plum) or the fourth determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + BB (2)) is made is satisfied In addition, a combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings in the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2) at a higher rate than the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) (orange- (Orange-orange, plum-plum-plum)
When the second condition in which the second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum +1 sheet (2)) and the third determination (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) are made is satisfied In addition, a combination of symbols (orange--) for generating the specific general winning in the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) at a higher rate than the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2). You may comprise so that control which derives orange-orange and plum-plum-plum may be performed (refer modification (13-2)).

  According to such a configuration, when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived. In the case where the second determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the third determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the fourth decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the fourth decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the third decision Since the ratio of the probability of the third decision to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that a special winning is permitted by the winning line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special prizes may be allowed to occur, but whether or not special prizes are allowed from the prize line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize is derived. It is impossible to discriminate, and the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is lost regardless of which winning line the symbol combination for generating a specific general winning is derived. It won't be lost.

  The control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning at a higher rate than the second winning line in the first winning line means that the first winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize. Further, the control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning in the second winning line at a rate higher than that in the first winning line means that the second winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize.

  Further, the symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

(L) An external test for performing processing for causing the variable display device to derive the same display result as when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation procedure based on operation procedure information for specifying a predetermined operation procedure The apparatus (test apparatus 1200) further includes output means (for example, a sub control unit 91 and an input / output board 1100) for outputting recommended operation procedure information for specifying a predetermined recommended operation procedure.
The output means outputs operation procedure information (recommended operation procedure information) according to the determination result by the prior determination means (see FIG. 36, modification (12)).

  According to such a configuration, in the external test apparatus, it is possible to identify an operation procedure that is likely to be actually performed by the player, and is derived when the operation procedure is performed according to such an operation procedure. A test can be performed based on the display result. As a result, the test can be performed on the assumption that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player.

  The output means outputs information for specifying an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting) (information that can specify the region numbers 1 to 21 for each of the reels 2L to 2R) as the recommended operation procedure information. (See Modification (12)).

  The output means operates as a recommended operation procedure information when a prize determined to be allowed to be generated by the pre-decision means is operated in a predetermined first operation procedure (a predetermined small combination is not awarded). Information for specifying a predetermined second operation procedure to be generated with a higher probability than when the stop operation is performed (see Modification (12)).

  According to such a configuration, in the external test apparatus, it is possible to identify an operation procedure that is likely to be actually performed by the player, and is derived when the operation procedure is performed according to such an operation procedure. A test can be performed based on the display result. As a result, the test can be performed on the assumption that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player.

(M) Special gaming state control means (when a big bonus or a regular bonus is won) that controls to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined normal state when a special winning among the plurality of types of winnings occurs Process to control the bonus corresponding to)
Preparation state control means for controlling to a predetermined preparation state when the special gaming state ends (processing for controlling to the preparation mode after the bonus ends);
Advantageous state control means for controlling the player to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and the ready state when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied in the ready state (when the special event stops in the preparation mode) Processing for controlling to RT), and
Derived by the derivation control means on condition that the determination result of the pre-decision means in the preparation state or the advantageous state is a specific result (replay + fall replay win, replay + fall replay + BAR replay win) Normal state control means for controlling to the normal state when the end display result to be obtained (falling replay) is derived (processing for controlling to the normal gaming state when the falling replay wins);
A notification condition (a table used for the second AT lottery) is set at a predetermined trigger (satisfaction condition is established) in the progress of the game, and control is performed for a notification period (AT) for notifying predetermined information (navigation effect) according to the notification condition. Notification period control means (second AT lottery process, AT management process executed by the sub-control unit 91);
When the determination result of the predetermination means becomes the specific result on the condition that it is the notification period (AT preparation mode, ART) of the period controlled to the preparation state or the advantageous state, Notification means (navigation effect execution process executed by the sub-control unit 91) for notifying the specific result time information corresponding to the specified result (navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that is won at the same time in the fall replay win) And
The derivation control means is when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result, and when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an end procedure corresponding to the specific result, the ending control means Control for deriving a display result is performed, and control is performed for deriving a display result different from the end display result when an operation is accepted by the deriving operation accepting unit in an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to the specific result. (See FIG. 18 (a)),
The pre-determining means determines that the specific result is higher in the preparation state than in the advantageous state (see FIGS. 17B and 17C).

  According to such a configuration, after the special gaming state is finished, it is controlled to the ready state, and if the advantageous condition is satisfied in the ready state, the advantageous state is controlled, and the end display result is derived in the ready state. Then, the normal state is controlled. For this reason, when the advantageous condition is established before the end display result is derived in the preparation state after the end of the special gaming state, the advantageous state is controlled.

  The end display result that prevents the transition from the ready state to the advantageous state is derived when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specific result and is operated in the end procedure corresponding to the specific result. When the operation is performed according to an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to, a display result different from the end display result is derived.

  Further, in the notification period of the period controlled to the preparation state, when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes the specific result, the specific result time information corresponding to the specific result is notified.

  As described above, the gaming state in the previous stage of the advantageous state is controlled to the ready state, and the advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous condition is satisfied before the end display result is derived in the ready state. In this preparatory state, when controlled during the notification period, by operating according to the avoidance procedure based on the information on the specific result that is notified, while avoiding the intentional derivation of the end display result, The game can proceed while waiting for establishment. On the other hand, when it is not controlled in the notification period even in the preparation state, it is not possible to avoid intentionally deriving the end display result because the notification means does not notify the specific result time information. There is a higher possibility that the end display result is derived prior to the establishment of and the normal state is controlled without being controlled to the advantageous state. Furthermore, since it is determined that the specific result is obtained at a higher rate in the preparation state than in the advantageous state, the end display result is derived in the preparation state and in the normal state than in the advantageous state. There is a higher possibility of being controlled. As a result, it is possible to give a clear degree of advantage to the player depending on whether or not it is controlled during the notification period in the preparation state that is the pre-stage of the advantageous state, and the expectation for being controlled during the notification period is effective. And can enhance the interest of the game.

  Similarly, even in the advantageous state, during the notification period, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result, information on the specific result corresponding to the specific result is notified. For this reason, in the notification period among the periods controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is avoided that the end display result is intentionally derived by operating in the avoidance procedure based on the information on the specific result to be notified. , The control can be continued in the advantageous state. On the other hand, it is not possible to avoid intentionally deriving the end display result during periods other than the notification period among the periods controlled to the advantageous state, and the end display result is derived and controlled to the normal state. The possibility that it will end up increases. As a result, it is possible to give a clear degree of advantage to the player depending on whether or not it is controlled during the notification period in the advantageous state, effectively increasing the expectation for being controlled during the notification period, and enhancing the interest of the game. Can be improved.

  Note that the notification condition may be a condition related to the control for the notification period. The notification condition may be, for example, a condition related to whether or not to start the notification period. More specifically, the notification condition relating to whether or not to start the notification period is (a) determined to control to the notification period in the slot machine that controls to the notification period on condition that it is determined to control to the notification period. (I) a ratio for determining the number of games reached until the control to the notification period is started in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on condition that the number of games reached has reached the determined number of reached games; (C) A slot that is controlled in the notification period on condition that the number of times of ending avoidance that has led to the display result different from the ending display result when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specified result has been reached. It may be a ratio that determines the number of times of arrival until the control to the notification period is started in the machine (see Modification (21)).

  In the case of the above (a), in the period controlled in the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition that is determined to be controlled in the notification period at a high rate (see the table in FIG. 28A and the table in FIG. 28D). In the case of (i) above, in the period controlled in the preparation mode or the advantageous state, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state except in the notification period. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a smaller number of reached games at a high rate (see Modification (21)). In the case of (c) above, in the period controlled to the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a smaller number of arrivals at a high rate (see Modification (21)).

  Further, the notification condition may be, for example, a condition related to a period controlled in the notification period. More specifically, the notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period is (d) control on the notification period on condition that the number of games digested in the notification period has reached the determined end game number. The ratio of determining the number of end games in the slot machine to be ended, (e) The end lottery is executed according to the end probability determined in advance in the notification period, and the control to the notification period is performed on condition that the winning in the end lottery is won. The ratio for determining the end probability in the slot machine to be ended, (f) The notification period, provided that the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specific result in the notification period and the number of times the specific result time information has been notified has reached the specified number It may be a ratio for determining the specified number of times in the slot machine that finishes the control to (see Modification (21)).

  In the case of the above (d), in the period controlled in the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a larger number of finished games at a high rate (see the table in FIG. 28A, the 30G digestion table, and the bonus winning table in FIG. 28D). In the case of the above (e), in the period controlled to the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a lower end probability at a high rate (see Modification (21)). In the case of the above (f), in the period controlled to the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a larger specified number of times at a high rate (see Modification (21)).

  In addition, the notification condition is, for example, (ki) a slot machine that draws whether or not to notify the specific result time information when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes a specific result during the notification period, and notifies when it is won May be a ratio for determining the winning probability. In the case of the above (ki), in the period controlled in the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a higher winning probability at a high rate (see Modification (21)).

  The notification condition may be any of the above (a) to (ki), or may be selectively combined among the above (a) to (ki). Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (a) to (ki) and selectively combined, it is in a normal state except for the notification period in the period controlled to the preparation mode or the advantageous state. Since the notification condition is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that at a certain time, the player can advance the game while expecting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the slot machine adopting (b) or (c) as the notification condition, a period during which the gaming state is controlled to be in the normal state when the end display result is derived according to the notification condition. Out of the notification period, the non-period notification possible period control means for controlling to the out-of-period notification possible period for notifying the specific result time information, and
Provided with out-of-period notifying means for notifying specified result information corresponding to the specified result when the determination result of the prior determining means becomes the specified result on condition that the notification period is outside the period In this case, the notification condition relating to whether or not to start the notification period may further include the technical matters described below.

  As notification conditions related to whether or not to start the notification period, (h) notification outside the period can be made on condition that the number of games digested in the out-of-period notification period has reached the determined number of out-of-period end games Execute out-of-period end lottery according to the ratio of determining the out-of-period end game in the slot machine that ends the control to the period, and the predetermined out-of-period end probability in the out-of-period notification possible period. The ratio of determining the end-of-period end probability in the slot machine that finishes the control to the out-of-period notification period on condition that the lottery has been won, The slot for ending the control to the period that can be notified outside the period on condition that the number of times the information on the specific result is notified reaches the prescribed number outside the period. Good rate, be an determining the period out prescribed number of times in Tomashin (see Modification (22)).

  In the case of the above (ku), the notification period control means is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the period controlled in the advantageous state than in the normal period in the period other than the notification period. Sets a notification condition for determining a higher number of out-of-period end games at a high rate (see Modification (22)). In the case of (1) above, the notification period control means is configured so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the period controlled to the advantageous state than in the normal state except in the notification period. Sets a notification condition for determining a lower out-of-period termination probability at a high rate (see Modification (22)). In the case of (v), the notification period control means is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the period controlled to the advantageous state except for the notification period than in the normal state. Sets a notification condition for determining a higher number of out-of-period prescribed times at a high rate (see Modification (22)).

  In addition, the notification condition is, for example, lottery whether or not to notify the specific result time information when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specific result in the (s) non-period notification possible period, and the notification is made when winning In the slot machine, the ratio for determining the winning probability may be used. In the case of the above (sa), the notification period control means so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the period controlled in the advantageous state than in the normal state except in the notification period. Sets a notification condition for determining a higher winning probability at a high rate (see Modification (22)).

  The notification condition in the slot machine including the non-period notification possible period control means and the non-period notification means may be any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa), Moreover, what was selectively combined among said (a)-(ki) and said (ku)-(sa) may be sufficient. Even if the notification condition is any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa) or selectively combined, other than the notification period in the period controlled to the advantageous state Since the notification conditions are set so that the player has a higher degree of advantage than in the normal state, the player can advance the game with expectation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

  (N) In the preparation state, the notification period control means sets the notification condition so that the player has a higher degree of advantage than in the normal state (see FIG. 28A). (See FIGS. 28B and 28D).

  According to such a configuration, in the preparation state, the notification condition is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. For this reason, even when the player is controlled to the ready state, the player can advance the game while expecting a sense of expectation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the preparation state, the notification period control means is more advantageous to the player by setting a notification condition for controlling the notification period at a higher rate than in the normal state (FIG. 28 ( b) and FIG. 28 (d)). According to such a configuration, in the preparation state, the notification condition for controlling in the notification period is set at a higher rate than in the normal state, so that the expectation to be controlled in the notification period is more strongly held. And can improve the fun of the game.

Further, the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result until the notification means reaches an upper limit number according to the notification period controlled according to the notification condition set by the notification period control means. The specific result time information corresponding to the specific result is notified (for example, it is repeatedly controlled to ART over 50 games as many times as the number of navigation stocks),
In the preparatory state, the notification period control means is more advantageous to the player by setting a notification condition for controlling at a high rate in a notification period with a high rate of the upper limit number than in the normal state. (FIG. 28 (b), FIG. 28 (d)) may be used. According to such a configuration, in the preparation state, when the notification period is set, the notification condition for controlling at a high rate is set in the notification period having a higher upper limit number at a higher rate than in the normal state. It is possible to have a strong expectation for the increase in the upper limit number, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (O) In the period controlled to the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the advantageous degree for the player is higher than that in the normal state (see FIG. 28A). The notification period control means sets the notification condition (see FIG. 28 (d)).

  According to such a configuration, in the period controlled to the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the notification condition is set such that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. For this reason, even when it is controlled in the advantageous state but not during the notification period, the player can advance the game while expecting a sense of expectation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the period controlled to the advantageous state, the notification period control means sets the notification condition for controlling the notification period at a higher rate than in the normal state except for the notification period. This makes it advantageous for the player (the 2nd AT lottery is performed with reference to the table at the time of digesting 5G to 25G in FIG. 28 (d) without winning the bonus. 30G in FIG. 28 (d) without winning the bonus. (The second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table at the time of digestion and is always controlled by AT. When the bonus is won, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table of FIG. 28 (d) and is always controlled by AT.) It may be a thing. According to such a configuration, in the period controlled to the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the notification condition for controlling the notification period is set at a higher rate than in the normal state. It is possible to have a strong expectation for being controlled and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result until the notification means reaches an upper limit number according to the notification period controlled according to the notification condition set by the notification period control means. The specific result time information corresponding to the specific result is notified (for example, it is repeatedly controlled to ART over 50 games as many times as the number of navigation stocks),
In the period controlled to the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the notification period control means controls the notification period with a high rate at a high rate at a higher rate than in the normal state. It may be advantageous for the player by setting notification conditions (the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table of FIG. 28D). According to such a configuration, in the period controlled to the advantageous state, except for the notification period, the notification condition for controlling at a high rate is set in the notification period having a higher upper limit number at a higher rate than in the normal state. Therefore, when the notification period is set, a sense of expectation that the upper limit number is increased can be made stronger, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(P) The derivation control means is when the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes a predetermined result (winning one of nine winning combinations (1) to (9)) that allows the generation of a predetermined prize. When the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the predetermined winning procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, a predetermined display result (combination of the winning nine winning combinations) for generating the permitted predetermined winning is obtained. When the derivation control is performed and an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a predetermined avoidance procedure different from the predetermined prize winning procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, a special display result (special appearance result different from the predetermined display result) ) Is derived (see FIG. 15B),
The advantageous state control means controls the advantageous state by establishing the advantageous condition by deriving the special display result in the preparation state (in order to control to RT when the special outcome is stopped). Processing).

  According to such a configuration, when it is not possible to generate the predetermined winnings allowed in the preparation state, it is not possible to obtain the profits associated with the occurrence of the predetermined winnings, but there is a disadvantage, Since the display result is derived and controlled to the advantageous state, the disadvantage can be compensated.

  (Q) When the notification result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result on the condition that the notification means is the notification period of the period controlled to the advantageous state, the predetermined result (Navi effect according to the type of the 9 winning combination when 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) are won) is notified (the navigation executed by the sub control unit 91) Production execution process).

  According to such a configuration, when setting an advantageous condition that triggers the transition from the ready state to the advantageous state, for example, there is no need to separately set a type of winning that establishes the advantageous condition. The design burden at the stage can be reduced.

(R) Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined normal state (processing for controlling to RT when the special event stops in the preparation mode);
An end display result that can be derived by the derivation control means on condition that the determination result of the prior determination means in the advantageous state is a specific result (replay + fall replay win, replay + fall replay + BAR replay win) When (falling replay) is derived, normal state control means for controlling to the normal state (processing for controlling to the normal gaming state when the falling replay wins),
A notification condition (a table used for the second AT lottery) is set at a predetermined trigger (satisfaction condition is established) in the progress of the game, and control is performed for a notification period (AT) for notifying predetermined information (navigation effect) according to the notification condition. Notification period control means (second AT lottery process, AT management process executed by the sub-control unit 91);
The specific result corresponding to the specific result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result on the condition that it is the notification period (ART) among the periods controlled to the advantageous state Informing means (navigation effect execution process executed by the sub-control unit 91) for notifying time information (navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that has been won simultaneously at the time of falling replay winning)
The derivation control means is when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result, and when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an end procedure corresponding to the specific result, the ending control means Control for deriving a display result is performed, and control is performed for deriving a display result different from the end display result when an operation is accepted by the deriving operation accepting unit in an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to the specific result. (See FIG. 18 (a)),
In the period controlled to the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state (see FIG. 28A). The means sets the notification condition (see FIG. 28D).

  According to such a configuration, in the notification period among the periods controlled to the advantageous state, when the determination result of the predetermination means becomes the specific result, the specific result time information corresponding to the specific result is notified. Therefore, the avoidance procedure can be operated so as not to derive the end display result. Therefore, when it is controlled to be in an advantageous state, it can be expected to be controlled during the notification period. On the other hand, during the period controlled to the advantageous state, during the period other than the notification period, the notification condition is set so that the player has a higher degree of advantage than in the normal state, so the player has a sense of expectation. While the game can be advanced, the interest of the game can be improved.

(S) Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined normal state (a process for controlling to RT when a special event stops in the preparation mode);
An end display result that can be derived by the derivation control means on condition that the determination result of the prior determination means in the advantageous state is a specific result (replay + fall replay win, replay + fall replay + BAR replay win) When (falling replay) is derived, normal state control means for controlling to the normal state (processing for controlling to the normal gaming state when the falling replay wins),
Notification period (AT for setting the notification condition (the table used for the second AT lottery, the number of navigation stocks) at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game (the lottery condition is established), and notifying the predetermined information (navigation effect) according to the notification condition ) Control period control means (second AT lottery process, AT management process executed by the sub-control unit 91),
The specific result corresponding to the specific result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result on the condition that it is the notification period (ART) among the periods controlled to the advantageous state Informing means (navigation effect execution process executed by the sub-control unit 91) for notifying time information (navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that has been won simultaneously at the time of falling replay winning)
The derivation control means is when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result, and when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an end procedure corresponding to the specific result, the ending control means Control for deriving a display result is performed, and control is performed for deriving a display result different from the end display result when an operation is accepted by the deriving operation accepting unit in an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to the specific result. (See FIG. 18 (a)),
In the advantageous state, the notification period control means is not controlled in the notification period, and is predetermined for a predetermined period (for example, a period in which five games are consumed, a period in which a specific winning combination is won or won a predetermined number of times, a fall replay is predetermined). It is decided that a lottery for determining whether or not to newly set the notification condition is performed each time a predetermined number of times have passed, and that the notification condition is newly set by the lottery. Then, a new notification condition is set, and control is performed during the notification period according to the notification condition (see the non-ART column in FIG. 27, FIG. 28D, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, in the notification period among the periods controlled to the advantageous state, when the determination result of the predetermination means becomes the specific result, the specific result time information corresponding to the specific result is notified. Therefore, the avoidance procedure can be operated so as not to derive the end display result. Therefore, when it is controlled to be in an advantageous state, it can be expected to be controlled during the notification period. On the other hand, in an advantageous state, lottery is performed every time a predetermined period elapses without being controlled during the notification period, so that the notification condition can be newly set and controlled during the notification period, so the player is notified in stages. The game can be advanced while expecting to be controlled during the period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (T) In the advantageous state, the notification period control means is newly set when a predetermined forcible setting period (for example, a period during which 30 games are consumed) elapses longer than the predetermined period without being controlled in the notification period. The notification condition is set, and control is performed during the notification period according to the notification condition (see the table for 30G digestion in FIG. 28D).

  According to such a configuration, in the advantageous state, when the control is not performed during the notification period, the fun that the game progresses with the final goal of passing the compulsory setting engine without the end display result being derived is added. Can improve the interest of the game.

  (U) In the advantageous state, the notification period control means performs the lottery with a probability corresponding to a length of a period that has not been controlled in the notification period.

  According to such a configuration, in the advantageous state, the expectation that the notification condition is newly set and controlled in the notification period is different according to the length of the period that has not been controlled in the notification period. Can improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view showing the whole structure of the slot machine. It is a figure showing the internal structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol on each reel which comprises a variable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the control circuit of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the display control circuit mounted in the production control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board | substrate. (A) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal IN signal, and (b) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal OUT signal. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of the start of a reel motor, (b) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of rotation of a reel motor and a stop. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and the technical matter relevant to a winning combination, (b) is a symbol combination and special combination of a predetermined special appearance. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to an appearance. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a probability state. It is a figure which shows each lottery object combination and determination value number which are acquired based on a game state and a setting value. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning a fall replay, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the special reel control of a middle reel when winning a strawberry. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery conditions used as the opportunity which performs 1st AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table referred in 1st AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table referred in 1st AT lottery. It is a flowchart for demonstrating point related processing. It is a figure for demonstrating point provision conditions. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for determining a grant point. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing difference number corresponding | compatible notification lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing notification lot corresponding to total number. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery conditions used as the opportunity which performs 2nd AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table referred in 2nd AT lottery. It is a figure which shows the promotion rate which the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 or more by AT lottery in non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, and is promoted to AT preparation mode or ART. It is a figure for demonstrating the number of navigation stock added at the time of alerting | reporting promotion conditions establishment. It is a figure for demonstrating the table used for non-AT navigation lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the example about the case where it is not controlled by AT and the case where it is controlled by AT according to the result of AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state effect performed according to the present game state and effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing alert | lottery lottery in a modification. It is a figure which shows each lottery object combination and the number of determination values which are acquired based on the game state and setting value in a modification. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control circuit of a slot machine on which a test apparatus for performing a type test and an input / output board for inputting / outputting test information used for the test are mounted.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to this embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the internal structure of the slot machine. The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b pivotally supported on a side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “melon”, “banana”, “black strawberry”, “white strawberry”, “blank (1) (stars without diagonal lines), respectively. ”,“ Blank (2) (stars with diagonal lines) ”,“ Deca (1) (upper half of stars without diagonal lines) ”,“ Deca (2) (lower half of stars without diagonal lines) ”,“ Red 7 A plurality of types of mutually identifiable symbols such as (black 7), white 7 (white 7), and BAR are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively. In addition, the portions other than the portions on which the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are drawn are white, and light is transmitted with high transmittance. The portions on which the symbols are drawn also correspond to the colors of the symbols. It is designed to transmit light.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIGS. 2 and 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are transferred to the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed changing continuously, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the reference position and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are irradiated with white light from the back side. A reel LED 55 is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  Further, a display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. There are two types of liquid crystal displays: a non-glare type liquid crystal display with non-glare processing on the surface of the liquid crystal panel and a glare type liquid crystal display with glare processing (gloss processing). In the embodiment, a glare type liquid crystal display in which glare processing is applied to the surface of the display area 51a is used. In addition, a backlight (not shown) that irradiates the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and a concealing member that conceals the inside is further provided on the back surface. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  Further, on the front door 1b, a medal is inserted using a medal insertion unit 4 into which a medal can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which a medal is paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player). A single BET switch 5 operated when setting the number of bets for a minute, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the gaming state within the range (the normal game described later in this embodiment) MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the state, the preparation mode, and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, and 2 for bonus, medal and bet stored as credits Settlement switch 10 operated when settling the medals used for setting the number (returning medals used for setting credits and bets), game Start switch 7 is operated to start the reels 2L, 2C, stop switch 8L is operated to stop each rotation of the 2R, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired during a big bonus, regular bonus, and RT described later, and when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 for displaying an error code indicating the contents and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, a 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, a 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 4).

  Further, inside the front door 1b, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, and changing a set value described later A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time or during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, are provided in a hopper tank 34 a provided inside the housing 1 a. (See FIG. 2) The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the side or the medal payout exit 9 side, the inserted medal that is inserted from the medal insertion section 4 and flows down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) having a sensor 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), the reel unit 2 including the reel LED 55, the external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, the hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and the hopper tank 34a A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided. .

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later. Switch 36a, for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement processing (processing for returning (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later It functions as an automatic settlement switch 36b, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for canceling an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. A reset that functions as a setting switch to change the set value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery, which will be described DOO / setting switch 38, a power switch 39 which is operated to turn ON / OFF the power supply is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line determined according to the gaming state among the winning lines L1 to L6 (see FIG. 1) becomes effective, and the start switch 7 is operated. Is in a valid state, that is, a state where the game can be started. When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. The winning line L2, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L3, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, which are set across the right-down symbols. , Set up over the upper line of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L4 set across the symbols arranged in the upward direction, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, ie, over the symbols arranged in the V shape. There are six types of winning lines L5, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L6 set across the reverse V-shaped symbols. Has been defined as down, normal game state, preparation mode, RT, big bonus, all winning lines L1~L6 the betting amount prescribed number is set is effective in regular bonus. The winning line is not limited to the lines indicated by L1 to L6, and may include, for example, a line extending over symbols arranged in the middle of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L6. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the game state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any activated pay line L1 to L6, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds). The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment). Random number generation circuit 42 for generating a random number, sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 Circuit 44, motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of flow path switching solenoid 30, and various displays and LEDs connected to game control board 40 The LED drive circuit 47 that controls the power supplied to the slot machine 1 When the voltage is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, an initialization command is not input when the power is turned on or from the main CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 that sometimes gives a reset signal to the main CPU 41a, an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A disconnection monitoring IC 50 for monitoring the above and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the main CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It has become so.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number, and in the present embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The main CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 according to the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are processed by software instead of using the random numbers extracted by the hardware random number function as they are. The main CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function). .

  In the power interruption interrupt process, the execution of other interrupt processes is prohibited with the start of the process. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all output ports are initialized, a RAM parity is calculated based on all data stored in the RAM, set in a predetermined parity storage area, and RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption processing, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area, and stored in the RAM by comparing with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup. It is possible to check whether the data being processed is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 49 outputs a reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the voltage rises to a level at which the main control unit 41 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the main control unit 41. When the value of the reset counter is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the main control unit 41, that is, when the main control unit 41 does not operate for a certain time, The reset signal is output to restart the main control unit 41.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  The production control board 90 is connected to electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. The electrical components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and a microcomputer including an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an effect driving LED 52, an LED driving circuit 93 for controlling driving of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53, 54, Switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from a reset circuit 95 for supplying a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and switches connected to the effect control board 90 Circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information The clock device 97, the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub-control unit 91; A touch panel controller 99 for performing processing for specifying a position where a touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the devices 56b and 57b, other circuits, and the like are mounted. In response to the command transmitted from the game control board 40 and the output information from the touch panel controller 99, various controls for performing the performance are performed, and each part of the control circuit mounted on the performance control board 90 is directly or Control indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Run. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the display control circuit 92 mounted on the effect control board 90. As illustrated, the display control circuit 92 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 141 and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 142. The VDP 141 has a high-speed drawing function and a display output function for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51, and executes image processing in accordance with a command from the sub-control unit 91. The CGROM 142 stores image element data and moving image data (effect data) displayed as effects on the liquid crystal display 51.

  The VDP 141 includes a host interface 151, a transfer control circuit 152, a CGROM interface 153, a drawing circuit 154, a temporary storage memory 155, a frame buffer memory 156, a display circuit 157, and a moving image decoder 158. Yes.

  The host interface 151 includes an address input terminal and a data input / output terminal for exchanging various data with the sub-control unit 91. The transfer control circuit 152 performs control to transfer the effect data read from the CGROM 142 to the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on a command from the sub control unit 91. The CGROM interface 153 includes an address output terminal and a data input terminal for reading effect data stored in the CGROM 142.

  The drawing circuit 154 executes a drawing process for creating image data of an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the effect data stored in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. The temporary storage memory 155 is composed of, for example, a VRAM (Video RAM) or the like, and includes an effect data area for storing effect data read from the CGROM 142. Further, in the temporary storage memory 155, based on a command from the sub-control unit 91, information indicating the rendering mode, information indicating that the reel transparent object is set in the transparent area, and information indicating that the transparent area is semi-transparent Etc. are also memorized.

  The frame buffer memory 156 is configured using, for example, a VRAM that is different from the temporary storage memory 155, and stores image data of an image created by a drawing process by the drawing circuit 154. The frame buffer memory 156 has two frames, and switching between image data writing and reading is performed every frame period. The display circuit 157 uses the image data read from the frame buffer memory 156 (for reading) as gradation data, and outputs the image signal to which the synchronization signal is added to the liquid crystal driver of the liquid crystal display 51. The moving picture decoder 158 is a circuit that decodes the moving picture data when it is read out from the CGROM 142 as effect data.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when a winning symbol is aligned on any winning line of the variable display device 2. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with transition to big bonus and regular bonus, small roles with payout of medals, and setting of bet number. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing. The big bonus may be indicated as BB, and the regular bonus provided during the big bonus may be indicated as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main CPU 41a, and the information output terminal board 1010 of the game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. Via a hall computer such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state Is an RB signal indicating that the RB is in progress, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, and a transition to the setting change mode described later. A setting change signal indicating a medal selector abnormality and a payout error signal indicating a hopper unit 34 abnormality are output.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, a challenge time (a gaming state where the number of sliding pieces on the reel is limited, but winning is allowed for all small roles) and a challenge bonus with a high probability of challenge time are provided. Although not installed, in order to share with the slot machine equipped with these gaming states, between the game control board 40 and the external output board 1000, in addition to the signal line for outputting the above signal, A signal line for outputting a signal during CT indicating that the gaming state is during the challenge time and a signal during CB indicating that the gaming state is during the challenge bonus is connected, and for error output that may be expanded in the future. The signal line is connected.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 for electrical connection with the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal), and (CB signal) are directly pulsed via the relay circuit 1001. The signal is output to the information providing terminal board 1010 as a signal.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal), and (CB signal) output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. Is done. On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The external output signal includes a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are not frequently output signals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal among these external output signals, The setting change signal, the input error signal, and the payout error signal are converted into a security signal, which is a serial signal that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000 and externally converted. The door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal can be output from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000. It is converted to a security signal, which is a serial signal, and output to the outside. For example, any one of a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a payout error signal can be output by an AND circuit or the like. If it is output, an error signal may be output to the outside with one terminal. Even in this case, an error occurs in the external device, the door is open, or the setting is being changed. It is possible to specify that any of them is occurring, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary. In this case, since a plurality of signals can be output to the outside with one terminal without being converted into a serial signal, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals (credits) used by the main CPU 41a to set the wager number as an external output signal as described above, for example, in order to manage sales in the hall computer. And a control for outputting a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals (credits) given to the player due to the occurrence of a prize to an external device as an external output signal.

  As an output method of the medal IN signal, a method of outputting every time the bet number is set can be considered. In this method, when the bet number is canceled after the bet number is set, the medal IN signal is output. There is a problem that control for canceling the output must be performed. In addition, when it is possible to set the bet number using both medals and credits, the bet number is set using a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the medals are inserted and the bet number is set and the credits. It is necessary to separately provide a program for outputting the medal IN signal when set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7A, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment detects the main CPU 41a when the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively detected, that is, when the number of bets used in the game is determined. Outputs medals IN signals for the set number of bets together.

  Specifically, when a predetermined number of bets has not yet been set and the insertion of a medal is detected in a state where the insertion of a medal is permitted, every time one insertion of the medal is detected by the insertion medal sensor 31. One bet is added. When the specified number of bets is set, the operation of the start switch 7 is validated. Thereafter, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, when the bet number used in the game is determined, the main CPU 41a collectively outputs the medal IN signals for the set bet number. In addition, when the bet amount is set by using credit for all or a part of the specified number of bets, the main CPU 41a is set when the specified number of bets is set and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The medals IN signals for the number of bets set to are collectively output.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game is started, that is, when the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is determined, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is collected. Since it is outputted to the outside, it becomes possible to omit the control for canceling the outputted medal IN signal in accordance with the cancellation of the betting number, and the control relating to the output of the medal IN signal can be simplified.

  In addition, since the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet number is collectively output when the number of medals used for setting the bet number is determined, the bet number is set by inserting the medals. Sometimes it is not necessary to separately provide a program that outputs a medal IN signal and a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the number of bets is set using credits, and a program that outputs a medal IN signal is shared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for outputting the medal IN signal.

  On the other hand, as an output method of the medal OUT signal, a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively at the end of the medal payout can be considered. In the former case, when a medal out error occurs while the medal is being paid out and the medal payout is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the number of medals actually paid out are changed. There is a problem that an error occurs and the external device cannot specify the exact payout number at that time. In the latter case, after the medal payout is completed, the next game cannot be started until the output of the medal OUT signal is completed.

  Therefore, the main CPU 41a according to the present embodiment indicates that, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Outputs OUT signal.

  More specifically, when a winning with a medal payout occurs and is added to the credit, each time 1 is added to the credit, the main CPU 41a outputs a 1-pulse medal OUT signal indicating the payout of one medal. When a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 34, as shown in FIG. 7B, one medal is paid out and the main CPU 41a indicates the payout of one medal every time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. A 1-pulse medal OUT signal is output. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7B, during the medal payout, it is determined that a predetermined payout medal-free time has elapsed since the last medal payout was detected, or the medals are continuous. If the detection time exceeds a predetermined medal clogging time and is determined to be a medal clogging, and if the payout operation is stopped due to a payout error state, the number of sheets actually paid out is stopped before the payout operation is stopped. Only the medal OUT signal is output, the payout error is canceled, the remaining payout is resumed, the remaining medal is paid out, and the medal OUT signal accompanying the payout of the remaining medals is output each time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Will be. Then, when the payout of the last medal is detected and the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the control of one game is finished, and the insertion of the medal is permitted at this time.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Even if the medal is out and the payout error occurs and the payout of the medal is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal is actually output. Since the number of medals paid out matches, the number of medals paid out can be accurately output to the outside.

  Also, in the method of outputting the medals OUT signal collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or the method of outputting the medals OUT signal collectively at the end of the medal payout, more medals are forced than the number of medals originally paid out. Medal indicating that one medal was awarded each time a medal is paid out, although it is difficult to detect it with an external device such as a hall computer when an illegal act of automatically paying out is performed. By outputting a signal, it is possible to accurately and accurately grasp the number of medals paid out by winning a small role on an external device in real time. It becomes possible to detect and such an illegal act can be prevented effectively.

  In addition, every time a medal is paid out, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal has been awarded is output. Therefore, the bet number setting operation is permitted immediately after the medal payout is completed. Therefore, since the next game can be started, the game can proceed smoothly.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are, for example, hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a large number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotating shaft are incorporated therein. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R receive a pulse signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on the control of the main CPU 41a, and the respective excitation phases φ1 to φ4 of the stator 32b are excited according to a predetermined procedure. Each time a pulse is received, the rotor 32a is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step).

  FIG. 9A is a timing chart showing a control method when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. In the figure, φ1 to φ4 indicate each excitation phase, “ON” indicates an excitation state, and “OFF” indicates a demagnetization state. When starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the main CPU 41a starts excitation in the rotational direction by a 1-2 phase excitation method, which will be described later, starting from the state where only the stop phase is excited. Specifically, for example, when the stop phase is (φ3), φ1 to φ4 are changed in the order of (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1). Excited alternately in 2 phase, 1 phase and 2 phase.

  If the excitation is started with a phase different from the stop phase as a starting point, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is suddenly attracted to the excitation phase, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, since the excitation is started from the stop phase as a starting point, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a starts smoothly.

  FIG. 9B is a timing chart showing a control method during rotation and stop of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R.

  First, during the rotation, that is, until the condition for stopping the reel is satisfied, the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, a pulse signal indicating excitation of φ1 to φ4 is turned ON / OFF at the timing shown in FIG. 9B, and (φ4, φ1), (φ1), (φ1,. (φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1)... in this order, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by exciting the φ1 to φ4 alternately for each phase and rotating the rotor 32a.

  Next, when the condition for stopping the rotating reel is satisfied, that is, when the rotor 32a steps out by an overshoot amount described later, an angle at which the symbol (target symbol) selected by the stop operation can be derived and displayed. When the angle position reaches the position (target stop angle position), the process shifts to the reel stop control from the excited state of the two phases. For example, when the condition for stopping the reel is established in the period shown in FIG. 9B as the stop condition establishment step, the process proceeds to stop control after waiting until time Ta when the two phases are excited. .

  The reel stop control is performed in two stages as indicated by T1 and T2 in FIG. The control performed at T1 is called 2-phase excitation stop control, and the control performed at T2 is called 3-phase excitation stop control.

  The two-phase excitation stop control is started from the time Ta when the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method and the state is shifted from the state in which the one phase is excited to the state in which the two phases are excited. In this control, the excited state is held for a predetermined hold time T1. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the state in which (φ1, φ2) is excited is held for the hold time T1 from the time when (φ1, φ2) is excited to the state in which (φ1) is excited. To do. As a result, rapid braking is applied to the rotor 32a of each reel motor that has been rotating at a high speed.

  The hold time T1 is determined according to the amount of overshoot that will cause the step-out, and varies depending on the magnitude of the holding torque of the reel motor, the inertia of the rotor 32a, the spring constant, and the like. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the amount of overshoot is four steps of the stepping motor, and the hold time T1 is set as a time required for the reel motor to drive for three steps. Then, the target stop angle position of the rotor 32a is set three steps ahead from the stage where the two-phase excitation stop control is started in accordance with the hold time T1.

  For this reason, at the time Tb when the hold time T1 elapses, the rotor 32a is in a position immediately before the target stop angle position, and the rotation speed is braked. Therefore, the three-phase excitation stop control is started by switching the excitation pattern at time Tb. That is, φ1 is demagnetized, and the stop phase φ3 corresponding to the target stop angle position and the two brake phases φ2 and φ4 at opposite positions across the stop phase are excited for a predetermined time T2. Thereby, the rotor 32a stops at the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3, that is, the target stop angle position while obtaining the brakes by the brake phases φ2 and φ4. As a result, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a stops at a target stop position where the target symbol can be derived and displayed without being vibrated accurately.

  After the three-phase excitation stop control is executed during T2 (Tc), the brake phases φ2 and φ4 are demagnetized, and the motor voltage is changed from H to L while maintaining the excitation state of the stop phase φ3. The reason why the excited state of the stop phase φ3 is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is that the rotor 32a deviates from the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3 due to the phase difference between the holding torque and the detent torque or the deviation due to the effect of friction. It is for preventing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from moving finely after being stopped, and the angular position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor is started next time from deviating from the angular position at the time of stopping.

  The excitation state of the stop phase φ3 that is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, without performing the next game start operation), and shifts to a standby state (demonstration effect). Is released when (the same timing as) has elapsed (Td). In other words, after the rotor 32a is stopped, if a predetermined time has elapsed without starting the next game, all of φ1 to φ4 are demagnetized. For this reason, for example, there is no burden on the components and the like constituting the stepping motor due to the heat generated when the excitation phase is continuously excited for a long time, so that deterioration of these components can be prevented. Further, in this embodiment, the excited state is released at the timing when the state in which the next game start operation is not performed continues for a predetermined time and shifts to the standby state (demonstration effect), so the player is playing a game. In the meantime, it is possible to maintain a state in which the symbols arranged on the reels are not easily displaced. On the other hand, in a state in which the player is unlikely to play, the load on the component parts of the stepping motor can be reduced.

  As described above, in order to start the rotation of the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. In this embodiment, the two-phase excitation stop control and 3 By performing the reel motor stop control together with the phase excitation stop control, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly braked by the two-phase excitation stop control and is guided to the target stop angle position, and then the three-phase excitation stop control. As a result, the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position by excitation of the stop phase while obtaining the brake by excitation of the two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position. The inner rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of four stages of 1 to 4, with 4 being the highest payout rate and the payout rates being 3, 2, 1 in this order. In other words, when 4 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the set value, when the power of the slot machine 1 is in the ON state, it is necessary to turn it off once, and after the setting key switch 37 is turned on, the power of the slot machine 1 needs to be turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, the game shifts to a state where the game can be started by setting the number of bets. It should be noted that when the power of the slot machine 1 is in an ON state, an operation for turning it OFF once, an operation for turning the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned ON, an operation of the reset / setting switch 38, An operation necessary for setting the set value, such as an operation of the start switch 7 for determining the set value, is referred to as a setting change operation. The setting change operation is not limited to such an operation, and may be any operation as long as it is an operation for setting a setting value.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. General work consists of data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, the total number of medals paid out in the BB, and a winning flag that is initialized at the end of each game (small role, replay ) And a winning flag are stored.

  Special work, data for sending commands to the production control board 90, various software random numbers, etc., data that is initialized only before the start of setting, at the end of each game, at the time of winning and setting changes Winning flag (big bonus, regular bonus) that is initialized at the time (when changing to the setting change mode), gaming state flag for specifying the gaming state of the next game, the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games This is a work in which the number of remaining games controlled by the RT is stored when the RT is finished. In the special work, an example in which the number of remaining games controlled by the RT is stored will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games digested after being controlled by the RT is stored. Also good.

  The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored, and is set to 1 after 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored.

  Even in the case of shifting to the setting change mode, in principle, information regarding the gaming state (the type of gaming state and the number of remaining games in the case of RT) before the setting changing mode is maintained. Thereby, for example, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode during RT, the game state is controlled such that the replay winning probability of the RT is maintained even after the mode change mode is changed. In addition, when the bonus winning flag is set for the special work and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the winning flag is initialized. For example, in the case of shifting to the setting change mode during the bonus winning, the winning flag of the bonus is initialized, and when winning in the bonus lottery, the winning flag can be set again and the replay winning probability of the RT is maintained. Controlled by the state. For this reason, in principle, an area in which a game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored is not initialized in connection with the setting change. As an exception, for example, when the gaming state before transition to the setting change mode is a bonus, a gaming state flag indicating a normal gaming state in relation to the setting change is stored.

  The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied.

  The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a starts up when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, or when only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When the BB ends, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both turned off and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. At this time, five types of initializations with different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and is performed when a change to the setting change mode is performed, or initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. Yes, in initialization 0, all areas (unused area and unused area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c except for the in-use stack area and the area where the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored (Including the stack area) is initialized and controlled to the normal gaming state.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed when only the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the stack in use in the storage area of the RAM 41c. The area, the area in which the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored, and all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the stop phase work are initialized.

  Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, an example in which initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed at the end of the setting change mode will be described. However, the first game before the setting change mode, during the setting change mode, or after the setting change is performed. May be performed until the start is started (until the start switch 7 is operated). In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost, so the set value work is not initialized.

  As described above, in order to start the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. If the data in the RAM 41c including the data indicating the stop phase is initialized, it is impossible to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a after changing the setting. When the reel motor is first rotated, Since the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to the excitation phase and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation, the rotation mode of the reel becomes unsightly and the player has forgotten that the setting has been changed. There is a problem of end.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, data indicating the stop phase when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are stopped (0, 1, 2, and 3 indicate φ1, φ2, φ3, and φ4, respectively) is allocated to the RAM 41c. By setting the set stop phase work, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a can be specified. When only the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up, and when shifting to the setting change mode, the RAM 41c is initialized, but the stop phase work is not initialized. Even in this gaming state, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. For this reason, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify the exact stop position of these rotors 32a. It becomes possible to start rotation smoothly. As a result, the reel does not vibrate when the reel is first rotated after the setting is changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an ON state at the time of starting, and the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized when shifting to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the stationary phase work according to the operation method when shifting to the setting change mode at the time of activation. As a result, it is possible to initialize the RAM 41c including the stop phase work, so that an illegal program or the like becomes resident by using the stop phase work assigned to store the excitation phase of the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the RAM 41c is initialized when only the setting key switch 37 is activated and the mode is changed to the setting change mode. At this time, the stationary phase work is not initialized. Even in the gaming state after the setting change, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting change by maintaining the data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R stored in the stop phase work. In this case, these stop phases can be specified. However, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the set value is changed, a specific initial excitation phase is used as the stop phase work. The excitation phase indicated by the data set and set in the stop phase work is excited before the game can be started after the setting change. Motor 32L, 32C, when rotating the 32R, may be able to identify these stop phases.

  Specifically, by clearing the data in the RAM 41c as the set value is changed, 0 indicating φ1 which is the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work. After the data indicating the initial excitation phase φ1 is set in the stop phase work, the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work, that is, the initial excitation phase φ1 is excited before the game can be started. . Note that the data indicating the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work by clearing the stop phase work in the RAM 41c, but the data set in the stop phase work is changed to the data indicating the initial excitation phase. By updating, data indicating the initial excitation phase may be set in the stop phase work.

  As a result, even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the setting value is changed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1 which is the initial excitation phase before the game can be started, and the angular position of the rotor 32a. And the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched, and then the data in which the angular position of the rotor 32a is set in the stop phase work when starting the reel motor in the first game is obtained. Since excitation is started in a state that coincides with the excitation phase shown, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a can be started smoothly. Therefore, when the reel is rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, the reel does not vibrate, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  Also, when the main CPU 41a is started, even when returning to the state before the power interruption, the specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work, and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work is changed after the setting change, It is preferable to excite the game before the game can be started. As a result, for example, the correspondence between the angular position of the rotor 32a and the stop phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work by moving the reel manually. Even when the power cannot be removed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1, which is the initial excitation phase, when the power is turned on, and the angular position of the rotor 32a and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched. Then, when starting the reel motor in the first game, the angular position of the rotor 32a is the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work. Since starting the excitation in match condition, it is possible to smoothly start the reels are integrally coupled with the rotor 32a.

  In addition, the excitation state of the initial excitation phase is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) without performing the game start operation, similarly to the excitation state of the stop phase maintained after the rotor 32a is stopped. It is preferable to be released when the standby timing (same timing as the transition to the demonstration effect) elapses, and by doing so, there is no burden on the parts constituting the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the overflow tank 35 is full based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a, and if it is determined that the full tank is full, a reset operation (reset switch 23 or Until the reset / setting switch 38 is operated), the game is controlled to a full error state in which the progress of the game is disabled.

  In the present embodiment, medals thrown in from the outside are first stored in the hopper tank 34a, and medals overflowing when the hopper tank 34a is full are stored in the overflow tank 35. The full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is detected by the full tank sensor 35a, and the full tank state is determined. However, the overflow tank 35 is not provided, and whether or not the storage amount of the hopper tank 34a exceeds a certain amount. A full tank sensor may be provided to detect whether the hopper tank 34a is full, and the full tank sensor is used to detect the full tank state. In addition, a first full sensor that detects whether or not the amount stored in the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount is provided. When the first full sensor detects that the hopper tank 34a is full, the flow path of the inserted medal is set. In addition to switching to the overflow tank 35 side, a second full tank sensor for detecting the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is provided, and the full tank state is determined based on detection of one or both of the first full sensor and the second full sensor. You may make it determine. For example, even when the second full sensor detects a full state, the medal stored in the hopper tank 34a may be paid out and the first full sensor may not detect the full state. By switching the medal flow path again to the hopper tank 34a side, medals can be stored until both tanks are full. Further, in such a case, even if only the second full sensor detects the full state, it is not determined that the full state is reached, and both the first full sensor and the second full sensor are full. When it is determined that the full tank state is detected, it is possible to further reduce the frequency at which the full tank state is determined.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the output state of the detection signal output from the full sensor 35a in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process. In the switch input determination process, when input determination of other switches (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) is performed, the state is switched from the off state to the on state, and continuously (for a certain period of time) The number of times assigned for each switch type) On the condition that the switch is determined to be ON, the ON state of the switch is determined and the detection flag of the switch is set in the RAM 41c. For 35a, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by switching from the off state to the on state, and the detection flag of the sensor is set in the RAM 41c. This is because the full sensor 35a is driven at a higher voltage than the other switches, and even if noise or the like occurs, there is little voltage fluctuation and erroneous detection is less likely to occur. In this way, in the switch input determination process, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by the detection signal of the full sensor 35a changing from off to on, and the duration from when the full sensor 35a changes from off to on. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the detection state of the full sensor 35a.

  The main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a (the presence or absence of a detection flag) only once per game at the timing when the insertion of a medal is first detected after the end of the game control. If the full tank sensor 35a is on, the full tank flag is set and the full tank flag indicating the full tank state is set in the RAM 41c. However, in the next game in which the re-game player wins, the game ends. The medal is not allowed to be inserted until the medals are inserted, and the insertion of medals is not effectively detected. In the next game in which the re-game player wins, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even if the full sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Further, the main CPU 41a detects the inserted medal sensor 31 even when the insertion of medals is not permitted. However, even if the insertion of medals is detected during the replay game, the effective insertion of medals is performed. In this case, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even when the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the main CPU 41a sets the bet amount using the credit, and even when the game starts without the medal being inserted, the medal is inserted. In such a case, the determination of whether or not the full tank state is reached is omitted, and even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected, the full tank state is not determined and the full tank flag is set. There is nothing.

  Further, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the full tank flag is set at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the full tank state is determined. When the tongue flag is set, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the replay game in-process flag is set in the RAM 41c before determining whether or not the full tank flag is set after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not the full tank flag is set is omitted. In such a case, even if the full tank flag is set, a full tank error state is set. Is not controlled, and if the replay game ends and is not a replay game, the full tank flag is determined at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, it is determined whether or not the full tank sensor 35a is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. If it is on, it is determined that the tank is full and a full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c. After that, if the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, after the control of the game is finished, the full-game error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted. On the other hand, when the re-gamer wins in the game and the replay game flag is set (not shown), the full game error state is not controlled after the game ends, and the next game (replay game) After the completion of, the full-error error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game (or the next game if the next game is also a replay game) can be inserted. That is, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the full tank error state is not controlled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the game next to the game won by the re-gamer, the insertion of medals is not permitted and the insertion of medals is not detected effectively. Even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected in the state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, when the re-player is not won in the game and the medal can be inserted, it is determined that the medal is inserted for the first time when the medal is detected, and the game is full. If the tongue flag is set in the RAM 41c and the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, it is controlled to a full tank error state at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the end of the control of the game.

  Although not particularly illustrated, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, if the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without the medal being inserted, No charging is detected, and even if the full sensor 35a is detected in such a state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, the medal can be inserted, and when the insertion of the medal is first detected, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is set in the RAM 41c. In other words, a game is played by setting the number of bets using credits. If no medal is inserted during that time, a full tank error state is not determined until the next game where a medal is inserted. There is no control.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, medals stored in the overflow tank 35 based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected after the game control ends. It is determined whether or not the amount of storage in the tank is full, and if it is determined that the tank is full, the progress of the game is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. For example, when a replay game or a credit is used, even if a game in which no medals are inserted from the outside, it is monitored whether or not the amount of medals stored in the overflow tank 35 is full. However, the amount of game media stored in the overflow tank 35 is full despite the fact that the amount of stored medals does not increase. In addition to being unnecessarily monitored as to whether or not the game has entered the state, it is controlled by a full-fill error more frequently than necessary, which causes annoyance to the player. There is also a problem that increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the next replay game in which the re-game player has won a prize as described above, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the end of the game. It is not detected and the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted, the determination of whether or not it is full is not performed wastefully, and the full state can be monitored efficiently. The control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and reducing the labor required for the store clerk to resolve the full tank status. It becomes possible.

  In addition, since the determination of the full tank state is made when the insertion of the medal is detected, in the replay game in which the insertion of the medal is prohibited, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is inevitably omitted. In performing the control for omitting the determination of whether or not the replay game is full in the replay game, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the game is a replay game.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, whether or not a full error has occurred at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected in a state where the medals of the next game can be inserted, that is, at the timing when medals stored in the overflow tank 35 increase. Since the determination is made, the full tank state can be determined at an efficient timing.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, when the insertion of the second medal or the third medal is detected in a state where the medal of the next game can be inserted, the bet number is set using credits. In some cases, an insufficient amount of bets may be set by inserting medals. In such a case, the game is determined to be full in the game even though the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 has increased. In this embodiment, after the game control is completed, the full tank state is detected at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected in the state where the medal of the next game can be inserted. Therefore, in a game in which the amount stored in the overflow tank 35 increases, it becomes possible to reliably detect the full tank state.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet amount is set using the credit, and the game starts without the medal being inserted. The determination of whether or not the tank is in a tan state is omitted, and in a game in which no medal is inserted and the amount stored in the overflow tank 35 does not increase, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not a full tank error has occurred. It is possible to monitor the full tank condition efficiently, reduce the control load required to determine the full tank condition, and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. It is possible to reduce the labor for the store clerk to eliminate the full tank condition.

  In addition, since the full state is determined when the insertion of medals is detected, the number of bets is set using credits, and it is inevitable when the game starts without inserting medals. The determination of whether or not the vehicle is full is omitted, and when the number of bets is set using credits and the game starts without a medal being inserted, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is full. In performing the control not to be performed, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the credit is used.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. The full tank error state is controlled before the next game medal can be inserted. For this reason, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated once in a state where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating by being controlled to a full tank error state from the start of the game to the end of the control of the game. The rotation state is stopped, and the full tank error state is controlled. Thereafter, when the full tank error state is canceled, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated again, or the hopper motor 34b is driven to perform the medal payout operation. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as stopping the medal payout operation once in a state in which the medal is paid out and controlling to a full tank error state and then restarting the medal payout operation when the full tank error state is canceled. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is determined whether or not a full tank flag is set. If the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state may be controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, even when the full tank state is determined after the game control is completed and the full tank flag is set, if the re-gamer has won a prize in the previous game and the next game is a replay game, the game is full. Since it is not controlled by the tan error state, the frequency of full tan errors can be further reduced, so that it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and reduce the labor for the store clerk to resolve the full tank state. It becomes.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the tank is full is determined at the timing when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the game is full at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, or to start the game. You may make it determine whether it is a full state at the time of operation detection, or the time of completion | finish of game control.

  Here, a modified example of the control in the full tank error state will be described. In this modified example, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing before the medal insertion of the next game is permitted after the game control is finished. However, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on the replay game flag before determining whether or not the tank is full, and determines that the game is a replay game. In the case, it is further determined whether or not the medal insertion flag is set, that is, whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and only when it is determined that the medal insertion flag is set, the full tank state Whether or not is determined. For this reason, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no medals need to be inserted in the game (when the game is a replay game), or the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, When the game starts without being inserted, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the determination as to whether or not it is full is omitted, and the full state is not determined.

  When the main CPU 41a determines that the game is full, the main CPU 41a disables the progress of the game at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and controls to the full error state until a reset operation is performed. To do. Note that the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game before determining whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled. On the other hand, if it is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted in the previous game, and if no medals have been inserted in the previous game, determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled, and if a medal is inserted in the previous game, the game control after the next game is over and the next It is determined whether or not the game medal of the game is full at a timing before the game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the control of the game ends, and the next game is a replay game. If not, it is further determined whether or not a medal has been inserted in the previous game, and if a medal has been inserted in the previous game, it is determined whether or not the full state is detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. When it is determined that the full tank state is reached, the full tank error state is controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13, after the game control is finished, when the medal insertion flag is not set, that is, when the number of bets is set using credits in the previous game, and the game starts without inserting medals. In this state, it is not determined whether or not the full tank state is reached. Even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in this state, it is controlled to the full tank error state after the game control of the game is finished. There is nothing. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the next game is a replay game after the game control is finished, that is, when a re-game player wins a prize in the previous game and it is not necessary to insert a medal in the game, It is not determined whether or not the vehicle is in the tan state, and even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in such a state, the full tank error state is not controlled after the game control of the game is finished. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In this modified example, as described above, after the game control is finished and before the medal of the next game can be inserted, it is only once per game based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a. If it is determined that the game is full, the game progress is disabled, and the full tank error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. Before, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game, and if it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted, and the determination of whether or not it is a full tank error is performed wastefully. The full tank state can be monitored efficiently, the control load required to determine the full tank state can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. Or to the Shii I think, it is possible to reduce the effort for the clerk to eliminate the full state.

  Further, in the modification, when the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without inserting medals, the determination as to whether or not the game is full is omitted after the game control ends. In the case where no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not the full tank error has occurred is not made wastefully, and the full tank state can be efficiently obtained. The monitoring load can be reduced, and the control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and the effort required for the store clerk to clear the full tank status. Can be reduced.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. After the game is over, the overflow tank 35 is determined. A full tank state can be determined before the number of medals increases. When the full tank state is determined, a full tank error state is set before the next game medal can be inserted, so that the progress of the game is disabled before the medal increases in the overflow tank 35, The storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase any more, and the full tank error state is controlled between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped once and controlled to a full tank error state, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are restarted when the full tank error state is released. Or when the medal payout operation is stopped by driving the hopper motor 34b, the medal payout operation is once stopped, Controls to, when the subsequent full Tan'era state is released, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such or to resume dispensing operation of medals. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated. Further, since the determination of the full tank state and the control of the full tank error state associated therewith are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. Even if it is determined whether or not, the full tank state can be determined after the game is over and before the medal is increased in the overflow tank 35.

  Also, in this case, when a full tank state is determined, the full tank error state may be controlled before proceeding to the next game. It is not necessary to perform control such as resuming control of the game, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. Further, since the determination of the full tank state and the control of the full tank error state associated therewith are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game state command, standby for the effect control board 90 A plurality of types of commands including a command, a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, a setting value command, a power-on command, an operation detection command, and a door command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command is set to the game state of the next game (normal game state, preparation mode, RT, big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) A command that can identify a set value, and is transmitted after a setting end command, which will be described later, and at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  The set value command is a command indicating the set value currently set, and is transmitted when the setting is changed and when the power is turned on.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on. Sent when.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state). Sent before the setting can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON).

  The operation detection command is the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, and these switches are effective in the progress of the game. Whether the bet number can be set and the specified number of bets has not yet been set, and the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 has been accepted. It is valid when credits remain and is invalid otherwise.Acceptance of the operation of the start switch 7 is valid until the start switch 7 is operated after the specified number of bets is set, otherwise The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted after the reels are rotated at a constant speed and the reels are ready to stop. It is valid until each stop operation is detected, otherwise it is invalid.The settlement switch 10 has a credit remaining or a bet amount is set in the period from the end of the game to the start of the next game. This command is valid when the switch is active, and otherwise is invalid.) When the detection state of these switches changes, whether the acceptance of the operation is valid for the progress of the game, Sent regardless of invalid period.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in start-up processing and game processing described later, temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work of the RAM 41c, and the timer interrupt processing described above. Sent in (main).

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  The door command is stored in a door command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c in the door monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and after the change of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Stored is a door command indicating the detected state. Further, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game ends, a door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set, and the door command transmission request 1 is set or the door is opened. When the detection state of the detection switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When this door command transmission request 2 is set, the door stored in the door command transmission buffer is set. Command transmission is instructed.

  The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c in the switch monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. The

  The operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one operation detection command can be stored is allocated. The operation detection command transmission buffer includes a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a detection state after the change when the detection state of the settlement switch 10 is changed. An operation detection command indicating validity / invalidity of each switch at the time is stored. In addition, the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is not cleared after the operation detection command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored operation detection command. It has become. An operation detection command transmission request is set when the detection state of any of these switches changes, and the operation detection command transmission buffer is set by setting the operation detection command transmission request. The operation detection command stored in the command is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a executes timer interrupt processing at intervals of 0.56 ms. In the timer interrupt process, timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to the timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. The command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is performed by timer allocation. The command transmission process is also executed at intervals of 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a acquires a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) that is executed at an interval of 1.12 ms. For this reason, every time the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process, that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the sub-control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once per four timer interrupt processes, that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. A plurality of commands can be transmitted by transmitting only one of a command stored in the command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Are transmitted at intervals of at least 2.24 ms, the sub-control unit 91 can reliably acquire these continuously transmitted commands.

  In the present embodiment, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the activation process or the game process, and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. In the door command, when the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in the activation process or the game process, or the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is changed. In this case, it is stored in the door command transmission buffer. The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer when the detection state of any one of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 changes. Is done.

  In the command transmission process in the timer interrupt 2, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an untransmitted door command transmission request stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command transmission buffer When a transmission request for the stored operation detection command is detected, a delay time is set, and when the set delay time elapses, the unsent command and door command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer The operation command stored in the door or the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  Specifically, in the command transmission process, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. When detected, the random number for delay set in the range of 0 to 17 is acquired and set in the delay counter provided in the special work of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is decremented by 1 and when the delay counter value becomes 0, An untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (2.24 ms). Specifically, the command transmission process is performed by subtracting 1 from the delay counter value acquired at that time. Is transmitted after the elapse of time (2.24 ms) {0 to 35.84 ms because the delay counter value is 0 to 17}.

  Note that the timer interrupt process is performed by interrupting the basic process for the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Since it is performed within (main), processing is not delayed due to command delay.

  In this embodiment, the normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area where a plurality of commands can be stored. The command stored in the normal command transmission buffer and the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer are provided. Alternatively, it is possible to store a newly generated command in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer without waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. This is not the case when the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands.

  In the command storage process, when a plurality of commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, these commands are stored in the order of generation. In the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It is like that. That is, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated.

  Note that the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with the highest priority. Before the power-on command or initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, other normal commands ( Hereinafter, commands other than the door command, operation detection command, power-on command, and initialization command are called normal commands. (In the case of an initialization command, store in the normal command transmission buffer before that.) Even if the normal command is not already stored since the data is also cleared, the power-on command or the initialization command is transmitted with priority.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set), in principle, the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the command stored in.

  Note that if the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is a power-on command or an initialization command, or if the normal command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer is waiting for transmission (delayed), the door command However, this is not the case when a request for transmission is requested, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted is given priority, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted After being sent, send a door command. If an untransmitted normal command remains in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting a normal command waiting for transmission, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority.

  In addition, when a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an operation detection command transmission is requested (when an operation detection command transmission request is set), or door command transmission and operation detection. When command transmission is requested at the same time, as a rule, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or the door command transmission buffer is stored rather than the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Priority is given to the door command being sent.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when a door command transmission is requested However, the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted with priority, and after the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted, the normal command or the door command is transmitted.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. More specifically, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door open detection switch 25 is made positive logic in the port input process performed in any of the timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 0.56 ms. Open detection switch 25ON = 1 (door open state), door open detection switch 25OFF = 0 (door closed state)), and is performed by timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 2.24 ms. In the door monitoring process to be performed, a logical state of about 100 ms (door monitoring process 45 times) is performed for the fixed state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the above-described port input process (the input state that is the same for two consecutive times). Subsequently, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is determined using the result. If the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 Is set to command transmission of the door command. When determining that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main CPU 41a sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. In addition, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the door open signal output state for the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  In this way, when commanding the transmission of the door command, it is also required to update the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000, so the door opening signal output state is linked to the door command transmission command. And is updated.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door command is performed with priority over the normal command, and the door command is transmitted after a delay time determined at random has passed in the same manner as other commands. On the other hand, since the maximum command delay time is 35.84 ms, when transmission of a door command is requested in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, after the door command is transmitted, Further, it takes about 72 ms to transmit the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer. However, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is further stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. If the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed if it is shorter than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command being stored, the normal command transmission buffer is stored while the change continues. Normal command sending buffer will not be sent, so normal command sending buffer overflows There is a possibility become. For this reason, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is longer than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. As a result, even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed, it is normal that after the door command is transmitted and before the next door command is transmitted. At least one normal command stored in the command transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection states of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 about every 10 ms. Specifically, in the above-described port input processing performed every 0.56 ms, an input state in which detection signals from the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are converted to a positive logic. (ON = 1, OFF = 0) are acquired, and the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed by timer interrupt 2; that is, the switch monitoring processing performed every 2.24 ms is 1 acquired in the port input processing described above. The detection state of the detection signals of the sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 (input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is about 10 ms (door monitoring process 5 Times) Continue to OR each separately and use the result to make one BET switch 5, M Determining XBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the detection state of the adjusting switch 10. When the calculation result is 1 when about 10 ms elapses, that is, when ON is detected even once during that time, it is determined that the corresponding switch is ON, and when the calculation result is 0, that is, during that time If ON is not detected even once, it is determined that the corresponding switch is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of each switch indicated by the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state. The operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is changed to an operation detection command that indicates the detection state after the change and indicates the validity / invalidity of each switch at that time. Update, set operation detection command transmission request, and instruct transmission of the operation detection command.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 128 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. Based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Control the device.

  In the present embodiment, the time interval (1.12 ms) at which the sub CPU 91a performs the timer interrupt process (sub) is shorter than the time interval (2.24 ms) at which the main CPU 41a transmits a command. If an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is received until the next command is received even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. In this case, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer, and when a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a is received, the first timer interrupt is performed thereafter. The command received by the process (sub) is read and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command for each of a plurality of types of stages (for example, the first stage to the third stage) for specifying the aspect of the effect by the character and the background, Control patterns of these effect devices, such as the lighting mode of the effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, and the lighting mode of the reel LED, are registered. When receiving the command, the sub CPU 91a refers to the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command among the control patterns registered corresponding to the stage set in the RAM 91c in the game in the control pattern table. The rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. That is, the sub CPU 91a controls the effect device so as to execute the effect according to the received command in a mode specified from the set stage type. The plurality of types of stages in the present embodiment include background images displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, characters appearing, sound effects / game sounds output from the speakers 53, 54, lighting patterns of the effect effect LEDs 52, and the like. At least one of the aspects is set to be different.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by reception of a certain command (excluding a continuous effect described later), the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, An effect based on a control pattern corresponding to a newly received command is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when a betting number setting operation is performed during execution of an effect (excluding a continuous effect described later), that is, the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the bet number has been set. Sometimes, the current performance is canceled. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received, the performance being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is finished. In such a case, the production is continued unnecessarily even though there is an intention to finish the game by ending the performance being executed. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  Each time a predetermined number of games are consumed, the stage is selected according to a predetermined distribution ratio and set in the RAM 91c. The distribution rate is set such that, for example, the probability of selecting a specific stage (for example, the first stage) is higher when winning the bonus than when winning the big bonus or the regular bonus. It may be a thing. As a result, it is possible to predict whether or not a big bonus or a regular bonus has been won based on the type of stage, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The control pattern table contains specific controls that are referred to when a specific command (standby command, stop command, error command, initialization command, setting end command, power-on command indicating that special role is elected, etc.) is received. When the pattern is stored and the sub CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the sub CPU 91a refers to the specific control pattern corresponding to the command regardless of the stage set in the game, and The effect device is controlled based on the above.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when the bonus finalization effect that informs the winning of the special role is being executed, the execution of the demo effect is prohibited, and even if a standby command is received in such a state, the demo pattern is not displayed. It is not referred to as a control pattern, and a demonstration effect is not executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the demonstration effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special role is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special role has won.

  Regardless of whether or not the effect state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the effect. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted, and even when other commands are received, An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until an initialization command or a power-on command is received after the startup and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected when the power is turned on and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 does not Since no initialization command has been received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup, the sub control unit 91 is turned on. It is impossible to avoid receiving the command and avoid the execution of the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is started, the state before power interruption is restored, and before power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is surely notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once in order to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). Even if it is used and illegally set to win the special role, when the main control unit 41 is restarted, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role has been won. Thus, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won to a player at the start of sales at a game shop.

  Further, the notification effect is continuously executed until a winning determination command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won. For this reason, until the special role wins, that is, until the winning flag of the special role is cleared, the notification effect will not stop, and it is not possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role win by the amusement store. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively suppress illegal sales such as providing slot machines 1 that are set in a state where a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop, etc. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special CPU is elected before the power interruption. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command indicating that the special role is won and the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command, the sub-control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51 that controls the special role. It is executed by a production device such as the LED 52, the speaker 53, 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Even if the special role is set illegally, the special control is made when the main control unit 41 is restarted. The winning device is informed that the winning is made and it becomes easier to distinguish, so the slot machine set in a state where the special role is won using a driving tool is used when the game player starts business. It is possible to more reliably prevent illegal sales, such as to provide.

  In the present embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, In addition, when the special role is elected before the power interruption, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout display 13 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 are notified of the special role winning. Also good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption. In such a case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  Based on the reception of the door command, the sub CPU 91a issues a door opening notification indicating that the front door 1b is opened. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives a door command, if no new door command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the received door command is confirmed and detected. If the confirmation detection state is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 blinks, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error warning sound is output. After that, the door command is received, and even if 100 ms elapses, the door command is not received and the detection state indicated by the door command becomes the definite detection state. If the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door is opened. Stops the notification and returns to the original performance.

  In addition, when a door command is newly received within 100 ms after the last door command is received, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection state. If no door command is received even after 100 ms after receiving a new door command, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the last received door command is set as the detection state, and the determination detection state is If it is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed, and if the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door open notification is stopped.

  For this reason, even when a door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received in a state where the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is turned OFF (door closing) within 100 ms. When the door command shown is received, the door opening notification is not performed, and even if the door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF (door closed) is received in the state where the door opening notification is being performed, 100 ms thereafter. If the door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received within, the door opening notification is not stopped.

  In addition, when a door command is received continuously within an interval of 100 ms, such as when a new door command is received within 100 ms after receiving a door command and then a new door command is received within 100 ms thereafter. In the meantime, the state of the door opening notification is maintained (if the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening notification is not started, and if the door opening notification is performed, it is continued) After the last received door command, the door open notification state is determined based on the detection state determined when 100 ms elapses, the door open notification has been performed so far, and the determined detection state is ON (door open) If the detected state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped while the door opening notification is stopped. If the opening notification is not performed and the determined detection state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is not performed. If the determined detection state is ON (door opening), the door opening notification is started. To do.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a only transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a, and based on the determination result. The door opening notification is made.

  Although it is necessary to open the front door 1b in order to perform some fraudulent action on the parts inside the slot machine 1 such as the game control board 40, in the present embodiment, when the front door 1b is opened, Since the fact is notified, it is possible to effectively prevent such a fraud and to detect it early even if a fraud is made.

  Conventionally, in the case of notifying the opening of the front door, the game control is performed based on the signal input to the game control means in spite of the fact that the effect control means performs error notification in order to reduce the control load of the game control means. It is necessary for the means to determine whether or not the front door has been opened, and the control load on the game control means cannot be reduced sufficiently.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and indicates the detection state after the change when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes. Only by transmitting a door command, it is not determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the sub CPU 91a indicates a door opening detection switch indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a. It is determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of 25, and the door opening notification is performed based on the determination result. Therefore, the main CPU 41a opens the front door 1b. In the notification, it is determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening). Detection chattering prevention determination of the switch 25) is not necessary to perform, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main CPU 41a.

  Further, even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed, the main CPU 41a transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at that time when the main CPU 41a is activated and when one game ends. Therefore, even if the sub CPU 91a misses the door command at the time of change, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 can always be acquired at the time of starting and at the end of one game. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 does not change after the failure, the state in which the change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is not reflected in the door opening notification can be prevented from continuing.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a, as a general rule, when the transmission of the door command is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set) when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is given priority over the command stored in the command transmission buffer, and the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 and the transmission of the door command are transmitted. The error of the interval can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the normal command transmission waiting state (during delay) stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the delayed normal command is given priority over the door command, and the delay time has already been reached. Even though the timing is started, the delay control is not complicated by interrupting the timing. Also, the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with priority over all commands including the door command, and the return of the sub CPU 91a is delayed by transmitting other commands first. There is nothing.

  In the present embodiment, once the door command transmission request 2 for commanding the transmission of the door command is set once, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes until the door command based on the command is transmitted. However, even if the door open detection switch 25 detection state changes while waiting for transmission of a power-on command or an initialization command, the door command is overwritten without being transmitted. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, a door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and transmission management becomes complicated when the door command is transmitted with priority over the normal command. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the door command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since the door command and normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to disable interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer. If the door command is stored while interrupting the message in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed is overwritten, and the door command is partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a command is stored, and when reels are shaken or medals are paid out. There is a possibility of affecting other controls such as blurring, but the door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer as described above, so that the door command is regularly used for basic processing. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic processing and stored in the transmission buffer within the timer interrupt processing (main) that is executed by interrupting the interrupt, it is necessary to prohibit the interruption when storing the normal command And the above problems can be solved.

  In the present embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25, and after the door command is transmitted, the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is further transmitted. It is set to about 100 ms, which is longer than about 72 ms required until the next door command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed. In the meantime, at least one normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer can be transmitted, and the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are operated based on the reception of the operation detection command. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives an operation detection command, if no new operation detection command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of each switch indicated by the received operation detection command is confirmed and detected. If any of the switches has changed from the OFF state to the ON state as compared to the previous fixed detection state, it is determined that the corresponding switch has been operated, and any of the switches is OFF. If the state has changed to the ON state, it is determined that the operation of the corresponding switch has been released.

  For this reason, even when an operation detection command is received and the detection state of any switch has changed, if an operation detection command indicating the same detection state as before the change is received within 100 ms, The operation or release of the operation is not determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, these switches are used in the progress of the game. When an operation detection command indicating whether the switch is in a valid state or an invalid state changes the detection state of these switches, the operation reception of these switches is a valid period for the progress of the game. The sub CPU 91a can specify the operation detected by the main CPU 41a regardless of whether or not the operation has been effectively performed. Sheet BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, checkout switch 10 In addition to the timing that coincides with the timing at which the game is activated and the game control proceeds, if the operation of these switches is in an invalid state, that is, the timing is not directly related to the game progress control. It becomes possible to execute.

  In other words, in order to perform a production operation, a new detection unit is not installed, but it is originally installed to advance the game, and the operation unit detects the game using the operation unit detected by the main CPU 41a. It is possible to perform operations for performance even in a disabled state, and the sub CPU 91a can perform performance using the operations of these operation means, so that the timing of the performance can be varied. You can have it.

  In addition, it is possible to specify whether the operation of each switch is valid or invalid from the operation detection command, and the sub CPU 91a operates the switch when receiving the operation detection command. An appropriate effect can be executed depending on whether or not the reception period is valid.

  Further, when transmitting the operation detection command, the main CPU 41a transmits an operation detection command indicating the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10. Therefore, it is not determined whether or not the switch is operated based on the detection state. The sub CPU 91a determines that the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the like based on the detection state indicated by the operation detection command received from the main CPU 41a. Since it is determined whether the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the checkout switch 10 are operated, and the operation status of these switches can be grasped based on the determination result, the main CPU 41a Send operation detection command Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not a switch that is in an invalid period, that is, a switch that is not related to the progress control of the game is operated (such as a chattering prevention determination), and the control load on the main CPU 41a is reduced. can do.

  Further, the main CPU 41a, when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, when transmission of the operation detection command is requested (when the operation detection command transmission request is set), or the door command When transmission and operation detection command transmission are requested at the same time, as a rule, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer or door command transmission rather than operation detection commands stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are sent. The door command stored in the trust buffer is preferentially transmitted, and the transmission of the normal command and the door command is not delayed by the transmission of the operation detection command.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when a door command transmission is requested In this case, the operation detection command during the delay is transmitted with priority, and the delay control is not complicated by interrupting it even though the delay time has already started. .

  Further, in this embodiment, once an operation detection command transmission request for instructing transmission of an operation detection command is set, the detection state of any switch changes until an operation detection command based on the command is transmitted. Even so, the operation detection command is not updated, and the operation detection command can be prevented from being overwritten without being transmitted.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and the normal command and the door command are transmitted with priority over the operation detection command. In this case, the transmission management is not complicated.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since the operation detection command and the normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer. If an operation detection command is stored while the normal command is being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the operation detection command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, and the rotation of the reel Other controls, such as blurring when paying out medals, may affect other controls. However, as described above, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interruption process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic process. It is no longer necessary to prohibit interrupts, and the above problems can be solved.

  The sub CPU 91a and the touch panel controller 99 are connected so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication.

  The sub CPU 91a instructs the touch panel controller 99 to perform a hardware reset at the time of activation, initializes the touch panel controller 99, analyzes the status report transmitted from the touch panel controller 99 upon completion of the initialization, and detects an abnormality. If not, a system-on command is transmitted to activate the touch panel controller 99 system. Accordingly, the touch panel controller 99 shifts to a state in which a touch operation can be detected.

  In addition, when the response to the command transmitted to the touch panel controller 99 is not returned even after a certain period of time, even when the sub CPU 91a is not activated, the sub CPU 91a instructs the hardware reset of the touch panel controller 99 similarly to the activation. The system is supposed to restart.

  The touch panel controller 99 determines that the corresponding beam coordinate is a defective beam when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds based on the signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. Thereafter, the detection of the touch operation at the beam coordinates determined as the defective beam is invalidated, and the detection of the touch operation is performed only with the activated beam. After that, when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, the detection of the touch operation at the invalidated beam coordinates is enabled again.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds, and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates. If the light receiving devices 57a, 57b and the light emitting devices 56a, 56b are damaged, if a solid object is attached, or if a defective beam is generated due to the object being placed, only the defective beam is invalidated, The touch operation can be detected by an effective beam, so that the touch panel can function normally even if a defective beam occurs. The touch panel can be used even though the touch operation can be detected by a normal beam. It can be prevented from disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the invalid beam coordinates determined to be a defective beam are validated when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, and are automatically restored. However, for example, the touch panel controller 99 may be restored with a hardware reset or the like.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a transmits a defective beam analysis request command every second. When the touch panel controller 99 receives the defective beam analysis request command, the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating the shielded beam and the shielding time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. Then, when the report returned from the touch panel controller 99 indicates that there are two or more continuous beams that have been shielded for 10 seconds or longer, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display Please display "and notify the user to remove the object on the touch panel.

  Thus, when there are two or more continuous beams that are shielded for a certain period of time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b, that is, when there is a possibility that an object is located on the touch panel, Since the notification for prompting the removal is performed, a defective beam due to the presence of these objects can be detected and eliminated at an early stage.

  In addition, since the notification that prompts the removal of the object is performed at an earlier stage than the time until the beam coordinates associated with the defective beam are invalidated, the cause of the defective beam can be removed before the beam coordinates are invalidated. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the sub CPU 91a notifies the user that the object is to be removed, and when the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating that there are no two or more continuous beams shielded for 10 seconds or more, that is, the object. Is removed and the defective beam is eliminated, or when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed, that is, when an object is left on or the light receiving devices 57a and 57b and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are damaged. In this case, the notification is stopped.

  The effect control board 90 according to the present embodiment can perform an operation test of each part mounted on the effect control board 90 by connecting a command simulator (game control board for testing) before shipment. .

  In the operation test, an inspection command specifying a component to be operated by the command simulator and its operation mode is transmitted.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is equipped with LED, lamp, cold-cathode tube and other electrical components, a speaker, a liquid crystal display 51, and a touch panel controlled by the sub-control unit 91. An output port and its output By designating the component corresponding to the port and its operation mode by the inspection command, it is possible to inspect the operation of the designated component. The inspection command is composed of 2 bytes. The output port is designated by the first byte, and the component to be operated and the operation mode are designated by the second byte.

  In the inspection command that inspects the operation of the lighting component, you can specify lighting and extinguishing as the operation mode, and if the lighting component can turn on multiple colors, you can also specify the lighting color It is.

  In the inspection command to inspect the operation of the speaker, as the operation mode, the output from both left and right only, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the sound ROM (ROM that stores sound data output from the speaker) Can be specified.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the operation mode includes color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen display, CGROM (liquid crystal display 51 ROM check of image data (CG data to be displayed on CG), display area check of liquid crystal display 51, display of image data A to D stored in CGROM, and check of VRAM. Is possible.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, it is possible to specify a defective beam check of the touch panel and an operation check of the touch panel as operation modes. When the touch panel defect check is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM ROM checks are also designated at the same time.

  As another inspection command, there is an inspection command for confirming the backup of the bonus effect. In this inspection command, the display of the bonus medium screen, the operation of the electrical component during the bonus, and the BGM output during the bonus are designated.

  One inspection command can specify only one output port, a component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode. When inspecting by operating different components of the output port at the same time, each output can be specified. Send inspection commands with specified ports continuously. For this reason, it is necessary to continuously transmit 40 inspection commands in this embodiment even if only a test for operating all the electrical components is performed, and the operation of components other than the electrical components is also tested at the same time. When performing, it is necessary to continuously transmit a maximum of 128 inspection commands according to the combination.

  Note that in the command simulator, an inspection command that specifies the operation of a plurality of electrical components, an inspection command that specifies the operation of electrical components, an inspection command that specifies the operation of a speaker, and an inspection command that specifies the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 The inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker and the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted simultaneously, but the liquid crystal display 51 different from the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted. It is not possible to simultaneously transmit operation commands that specify operations that cannot be performed simultaneously, such as inspection commands that specify the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 and inspection commands that specify the operation of the touch panel. It has become.

  As described above, if an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is the next command even if commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. Since it is read out by the timer interrupt process (sub) before reception, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer. However, in the operation test by the command simulator, a maximum of 128 inspection commands are continuously recorded. Since there is a possibility of transmission, an area capable of storing 128 commands is provided in the reception buffer of the RAM 91c.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a receives it from the reception buffer at the earliest stage. The read command is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read command is an inspection command. As a result, when the read command is an inspection command, the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode are specified, and the specified component is operated in the specified operation mode. As a result, the operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the command simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the electrical component, the sub CPU 91a identifies the electrical component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode such as lighting, extinction, and lighting color, and designates the corresponding electrical component. The operation is performed in the mode described above.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the speaker, the operation designated by the inspection command such as output from both the left only, the right only from both the left and right, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the audio ROM The mode is specified, and the speaker is operated in the specified operation mode. In particular, when the ROM check of the voice ROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the voice ROM and the data stored in the ROM 91b are collated, and the result of whether or not they match is indicated on the liquid crystal display 51. To display.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the color bar, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, and electrostatic test screen is displayed. The operation mode specified by the inspection command such as the CGROM ROM check, the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the image data A to D stored in the CGROM, the VRAM check is specified, and the liquid crystal display 51 is specified. It operates in the mode of operation. In particular, when the ROM check of the CGROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the CGROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b as in the case of the ROM check of the audio ROM. The result of whether or not to do so is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51 is designated, an image showing the displayable area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the VRAM check is designated, the VRAM is expanded in the memory area and an image for VRAM check is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, the sub CPU 91a specifies an operation mode designated by the inspection command, such as a check for a defective beam on the touch panel, an operation check on the touch panel, and the touch panel and the liquid crystal display 51. Operate in the specified operation mode. In particular, when a check for a defective beam on the touch panel is designated, a defective beam analysis request command is transmitted to the touch panel controller 99, and whether there is a beam that is blocked for 60 seconds or more based on the returned report. If there is a beam that is shielded for 60 seconds or longer, a red line is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in correspondence with the shielded beam. In addition, when the check of the defective beam of the touch panel is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM are also checked. In addition, there are two types of touch panel operation checks. When operation check 1 is specified, the touch panel is fully activated, a ticker “Please touch” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a touch operation is detected. The reception of a new command is prohibited until it is done. When the operation check 2 is designated, the entire touch panel is enabled, and a 64 divided screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the color of the frame where the touch operation is detected is changed. Also in this case, reception of a new command is prohibited until a touch operation is detected.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives the inspection command for inspecting the backup of the bonus effect, the sub CPU 91a specifies the component and the operation mode specified by the inspection command, and the operation mode in which the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker, and the electrical decoration component are specified. Operate with.

  As described above, the sub CPU 91a identifies the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode based on the reception of the inspection command, and operates the specified component in the specified operation mode. The operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  In general, the effect control means has the same number of reception buffers as the transmission buffers of the game control means, and the number of transmission buffers and the number of reception buffers are such that there is no overflow in the case of a normal game. Therefore, as long as the game is played normally, more commands than the reception buffer are not transmitted continuously, and the command transmitted from the game control means overflows. There is no. However, in the operation test for inspecting whether or not the production control means operates normally during development or before shipment as described above, a large number of commands are connected by connecting the test game control means to the production control means. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the operation test by continuously transmitting the message, but if the number of reception buffers is the same as the number of transmission buffers as described above, a large number of commands are transmitted during the operation test. There is a risk that the reception buffer overflows and the operation test cannot be performed accurately. For this reason, it is necessary to increase the number of commands or transmission intervals that are continuously transmitted during the operation test, and as a result, there arises a problem that the efficiency of the operation test cannot be sufficiently increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a command that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 is stored in a reception buffer that stores a command received by the sub control unit 91 from the main control unit 41. A storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the command storage area of the normal command transmission buffer is provided. Thus, when an operation test board such as a command simulator is connected to the effect control board 90 and an operation test is performed, the number of inspection commands that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval can be transmitted even when the inspection commands are continuously transmitted. However, the number of storage areas of the normal command transmission buffer provided in the main control unit 41, that is, the number of storage areas allocated in such a number as to prevent overflow in the case of a normal game (16 commands in this embodiment) ), And a large number of inspection commands can be transmitted continuously up to the limit of the storage area of the reception buffer (128 commands in this embodiment). Can effectively increase the efficiency.

  In the present embodiment, for each inspection command, a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts can be individually specified and an operation test can be performed. By transmitting inspection commands for designating a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts, it is possible to accurately inspect whether or not each effect part operates normally. .

  In the present embodiment, when an operation test is performed in the slot machine 1, it is possible to specify only one output port, an effect part corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command. Therefore, a storage area that can store a larger number of commands on the basis of the number of output ports is provided in the storage area of the reception buffer. In this case, even when test commands corresponding to the respective output ports are continuously transmitted, the reception buffer does not overflow, so that the operation test can be performed more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command, but with one inspection command. It may be possible to specify only one production component and its operation correspondence. In this case, by providing a storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the number of production components in the reception buffer, When performing performance tests for all production parts at once, even if inspection commands corresponding to each production part are sent continuously, the reception buffer does not overflow, so operation is more efficient. A test can be performed.

  Further, in the gaming machine in which the production control means controls the production according to the operation of the production operation means such as the touch panel as in the present embodiment, it is necessary to inspect the detection status of the operation of the production operation means. In this case, if the next inspection command is erroneously transmitted before the operation is detected, the next inspection command is received without waiting for the detection of the operation of the operation means for production, and the next operation There is a problem that the test is shifted to the test, and the inspection of the detection status of the operation of the operation means for production cannot be normally performed.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91a according to the present embodiment receives an inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel and performs the operation check of the touch panel, the touch operation is detected in the command reception interrupt process. In the meantime, no new command is received. Even if a new command is sent during this period, a new command is detected until the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. Is not received, and processing based on the command is not performed. For this reason, even when an inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  The sub CPU 91a not only prohibits command reception interrupt processing but also stores it in the reception buffer until a touch operation is detected after receiving an inspection command designating an operation check of the touch panel. Even if the command has already been received and the received command is stored in the reception buffer, the touch operation is detected until the operation check is completed. The processing based on the command stored in the reception buffer is not performed. For this reason, even when another inspection command is transmitted continuously with the inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  In this embodiment, the touch panel is applied as the production operation means. However, production operation means other than the touch panel, for example, buttons and dials may be applied, and operation checks other than the production operation means other than the touch panel may be applied. In the same way as above, even if the inspection command is erroneously sent without waiting for the completion of the operation check, the operation check is performed by prohibiting the reception of the command until the operation of the production operation means is detected. The test can be performed normally, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not read out until the operation of the production operation means is detected, so that the test command for specifying the operation check can be used. Even when the inspection command is transmitted, the operation check can be normally performed.

  FIG. 15A is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations, and FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to a symbol combination and a special appearance. FIG. 16A is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41, and FIG. 16B shows the transition of the probability state controlled by the sub control unit 91. It is a figure for demonstrating.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), the main control unit 41 has a predetermined advantageous condition (a special exit stop described later) in the preparation mode and the preparation mode controlled after the bonus ends. RT controlled by establishment, normal game state controlled by establishment of predetermined end condition (falling replay winning to be described later) in the preparation mode and RT, internal RT controlled by bonus internal winning, It is controlled to any one of bonuses controlled by bonus winning. RT can be said to be an advantageous state for the player over the preparation mode and the normal gaming state in that the winning rate of the replay that does not involve the transition of the gaming state among the re-gamers is extremely high.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming state to the preparation mode, RT, normal gaming state, internal RT, and bonus, while the gaming state is the preparation mode. When it is or RT, the sub control unit 91 can control the effect state during the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period in which the navigation effect for notifying the internal lottery result can be executed. A state in which the gaming state is the preparation mode and the production state is controlled by the AT is referred to as an AT preparation mode, and a state in which the gaming state is the preparation mode but the production state is not controlled by the AT is also referred to as a non-AT preparation mode. . A state in which the gaming state is RT and the effect state is controlled by AT is also referred to as ART, and a state in which the game state is RT but the effect state is not controlled by AT is also referred to as non-ART.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), the sub-control unit 91 is controlled to a high probability state on condition that the bonus ends or melon winning which will be described later is performed. It is controlled to a low probability state on condition that the number of games is consumed or a bonus is won. When the probability state is a high probability state, or when the gaming state is in a bonus state, a point relating to the probability controlled by the AT is awarded by satisfying a predetermined point granting condition as will be described later.

  Referring to FIG. 15 (a), the special combination among the winning combinations includes a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), and a regular bonus.

  The big bonus (1) is won when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The big bonus (2) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When either of the big bonuses (1) or (2) is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus.

  When the big bonus is controlled, the regular bonus is repeatedly controlled until the big bonus ends. While the gaming state is the big bonus, a big bonus medium flag corresponding to the type of the big bonus won is set in the RAM 41c. Further, during the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the big bonus medium flag is set to the ON state, the regular bonus medium flag is repeatedly set to the ON state when the regular bonus medium flag is not set to the ON state when the game is started. The

  The big bonuses (1) and (2) are terminated on condition that 270 or more medals have been paid out to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the game state is controlled to the internal RT from when the big bonus (1), (2), and the regular bonus are both won to winning. In the internal RT, the probability of winning the replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  When the big bonus is won, after the big bonus is over, all operations of the player are invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game is controlled in a frozen state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. In addition, when the big bonus ends when the stop function is enabled, all operations of the player are invalidated except for the payment of credits, and reset to a stop state in which the game cannot be progressed. Control is performed until the / setting switch 38 is operated. Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, after the big bonus is ended, the gaming state is controlled to the preparation mode.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-red 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the regular bonus.

  When the regular bonus is won, the regular bonus is controlled until 12 games are consumed or 8 times. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the game state is controlled to the above-described internal RT until the regular bonus is won after the regular bonus is won internally.

  In addition, when the regular bonus is won, after the regular bonus is over, all operations of the player are invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game is controlled in a frozen state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. In addition, when the regular bonus ends when the stop function is enabled, all operations of the player are disabled except for the payment of credits, and reset to a stop state in which the progress of the game becomes impossible Control is performed until the / setting switch 38 is operated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 16A, after the regular bonus is ended, the gaming state is controlled to the preparation mode in the same manner as when the big bonus is ended.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the probability state controlled by the sub-control unit 91 is a high probability state, when the big bonus or the regular bonus is won, the probability state is controlled to a low probability state. After the regular bonus ends, the low probability state is controlled to the high probability state. The high probability state controlled by the end of the big bonus or the regular bonus is continuously controlled until 50 games are consumed or the bonus is won.

  In this embodiment, when one of the big bonuses (1), (2), and the regular bonus is won and when it is finished, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not to control the effect state to AT. AT lottery to be performed. The AT lottery includes a first AT lottery for lottery according to the probability corresponding to the total number of points given, and a second AT lottery for lottery according to the probability corresponding to the established lottery condition.

  The AT lottery refers to a lottery for the sub-control unit 91 to determine, for example, whether or not to control the AT using a random number extracted from a random counter and a period during which the AT can be controlled. Further, the AT lottery is not limited to when the bonus is won or when the bonus is ended, but is also executed by using a predetermined number of games in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART as will be described later. When the sub-control unit 91 is won in the bonus lottery or the AT lottery by the end of the bonus, the presentation state is controlled to AT after the bonus ends, and the sub-control unit 91 is won in the AT lottery by using a predetermined number of games in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART. Sometimes the production state is controlled to AT from the next game or the game won for the fall replay.

  Even if one of the big bonus and regular bonus is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, There will be no winnings. This is because the symbols (“red 7” and “white 7”) constituting the big bonus and the regular bonus are not arranged within 7 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  Next, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the small combinations include strawberry (1), strawberry (2), melon, and nine-piece combination (1) to nine-piece combination (9). Among the small roles, melon is awarded when a combination of “melon-melon-melon” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When melon wins, 9 medals are paid out. In principle, the melon can be awarded regardless of the operation procedure of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. This is because the symbols constituting the melon ("melon") are arranged within 7 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the melon is won when the probability state controlled by the sub-control unit 91 is the low-probability state, whether or not the sub-control unit 91 controls the high-probability state. A high probability lottery will be held. In addition, when the winning is performed by the high probability state lottery, the sub control unit 91 controls the probability state to the high probability state. The probability of winning in the high probability state lottery is set to 50%, for example. The high-probability state controlled by winning the high-probability state lottery is continuously controlled until 30 games are consumed or a bonus is won.

  In addition, when the probability state controlled by the sub-control unit 91 is a high probability state, the point granting lottery for determining whether or not to give a point related to the winning probability of the first AT lottery is triggered by winning the melon. Executed. In addition, when the melon is won in the low probability state, and when it is won by the high probability state lottery and controlled to the high probability state, the point giving lottery is further executed. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning the melon in the low probability state.

  Next, among the small roles, strawberry (1) becomes a winning when a symbol of “black strawberry” is derived on one of the winning lines for reel 2L, and two medals are paid out. Among the small roles, the strawberry (2) is awarded when the symbol “white strawberry” is derived on one of the winning lines for the reel 2L, and two medals are paid out. If the symbol “black strawberry” or “white strawberry” stops at the upper or lower level of the left reel 2L, the winning lines L1, L3, L5 or the winning lines L2, L4, L6 are on the three winning lines. Since winning the strawberry (1) or strawberry (2), 6 medals are paid out.

  If the strawberry (1) or the strawberry (2) is won during the bonus, a notification promoting condition that promotes control to the AT is established, as will be described later with reference to FIG. Specifically, when the notification promotion condition is established by winning strawberry (1) or strawberry (2) in the bonus, processing for ensuring that the AT is controlled after the bonus ends. In the present embodiment, the notification promoting condition that is more advantageous for the player is established when the strawberry (2) is won than when the strawberry (2) is not won.

  In addition, if the strawberry (1) or the strawberry (2) is won in the high probability state, the points related to the winning probability of the first AT lottery are always given.

  Further, only in the game where the strawberry (1) or the strawberry (2) is won, special reel control is performed so that a special outcome can be stopped on the winning line. Thereby, even if it is a case where neither a strawberry (1) nor a strawberry (2) is won, a special turn is stopped, and the strawberry (1) or the strawberry (2) is won. This can be notified to the player.

  Next, nine-piece roles (1) to (9) will be described. The 9-piece winning combination (1) is awarded when a combination of “red 7-blank (1) -red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece combination (2) wins when a combination of “white 7-blank (1) -red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (3) is awarded when the combination of “BAR-Blank (1) -Red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (4) is awarded when a combination of “red 7-blank (1) -white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (5) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-blank (1) -white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (6) is awarded when the combination of “BAR-Blank (1) -White 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (7) is awarded when a combination of “red 7-blank (1) -BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (8) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-blank (1) -BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (9) is awarded when the combination of “BAR-Blank (1) -BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the symbols constituting each of the nine-piece roles (1) to (9) are not arranged within 7 frames on the reels 2L and 2R, but are arranged within 7 frames on the reel 2C. ing. For this reason, even if one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won in the internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L and 8R must be operated at an appropriate timing to enable winning of these winning combinations. , I will not win the winning nine-piece role.

  Further, the left symbol and the right symbol constituting each of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) are arranged 7 frames apart on each of the reels 2L and 2R. For this reason, the combination of the operation timings of the stop switches 8L to 8R ("operation procedure") for deriving each of the 9-sheet roles (1) to (9) is different for each of the 9-sheet roles (1) to (9). Can be made. For example, the operation procedure for deriving the nine-piece combination (1) is to operate the stop switch 8L at a timing at which “red 7” of the left reel 2L can be drawn into the pay line, and “red 7” of the right reel 2R. Is a procedure for operating the stop switch 8R at a timing at which can be drawn into the winning line. The operation procedure for deriving the 9-piece combination (9) is that the “BAR” of the left reel 2L is operated at a timing at which the “BAR” can be pulled into the winning line, and the “BAR” of the right reel 2R is won. This is a procedure for operating the stop switch 8R at a timing that can be pulled into the line.

  In a state where it is not recognized which of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won, when the stop switches 8L and 8R are operated, the left symbol and the right constituting the winning nine winning combination The symbol is drawn with a probability of 1/3 × 1/3 = 1/9 and won, and the other 8/9 cannot be drawn and cannot win.

  On the other hand, the nine role combinations (1) to (9) are navigation target combinations in which a navigation effect corresponding to the selected type is executed on the condition that it is the above-described ART. For this reason, when it is ART, information corresponding to the winning nine winning combination is notified. The information corresponding to the type of the winning combination may be, for example, information that can specify the type of the nine winning combination, and the operation procedure for winning the winning nine winning combination can be specified. It may be information. As a result, in ART, the player can recognize the type of the 9 winning combination and can operate the stop switches 8L and 8R at an appropriate timing for winning the notified 9 winning combination. As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of 9-piece missing.

  In addition, refer to FIG. 31 when the nine-player roles (1) to (9) are won during the above-described non-ART or during the period from when the RT is controlled to the normal gaming state until the predetermined number of games are consumed. As will be described later, a navigation effect corresponding to the type selected in accordance with a predetermined probability is executed. For this reason, the occurrence of a missing piece can be reduced even when the nine winning combination is not controlled by the AT.

  In addition, when the gaming state is in bonus, points related to the winning probability of the 1st AT lottery will always be given when any of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) wins and wins alone. Is done.

  Next, among the winning combinations, the replaying combination will be described. Among the winning combinations, the replaying combination includes replay, falling replay, and BAR replay. When you win one of the re-players, you will not be paid out medals, but you can start the next game without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets corresponding to the number of bets that you no longer need to set in the next game This is essentially the same as when medals are paid out.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the replay (“banana”) are arranged within 7 frames on each reel. Therefore, as a rule, it can be said that the replay is a role that can win a prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won.

  The tumble replay is awarded when a combination of “melon-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the tumble replay ("melon" on the left reel 2L, "reel" on the middle reel 2C, and "banana" on the right reel 2R) are arranged within 7 frames on each reel. Therefore, it can be said that, as a general rule, the fall replay can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won. As shown in FIG. 16A, after winning the fall replay in the preparation mode or RT, the game state is controlled to the normal gaming state. In addition, when winning a fall replay in the AT preparation mode or ART, the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state and the AT is terminated.

  The fall replay is a navigation target combination in which a navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay selected is executed on condition that the AT preparation mode or ART described above is used. Therefore, in the AT preparation mode or ART, when the fall replay is won, information corresponding to the type of replay won simultaneously with the fall replay is notified. The information corresponding to the type of replay that was won at the same time as the fall replay may be information that can identify the type of replay that was won at the same time, and the winning of the fall replay according to the type of replay that was won at the same time. It may be information that can specify an operation procedure for avoiding the problem. Thereby, in AT preparation mode or ART, a fall replay winning can be avoided, and as a result, it can intentionally avoid being controlled to a normal gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, even if the fall replay is won, the navigation effect is not executed, so the fall replay winning can not be intentionally avoided, and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state. It can be said that the possibility of being increased. In this way, when controlled in the preparation mode or RT, depending on whether or not the production state is AT, the difference in the player's advantage is increased, and the AT is selected in the AT lottery. The expectation for winning can be effectively increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  The BAR replay is awarded when a combination of “BAR-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Among the symbols constituting the BAR replay, the symbols (“banana”) of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are arranged within seven frames on each reel. On the other hand, among the symbols constituting the BAR replay, the symbol (“BAR”) of the left reel 2L is not arranged within seven frames on the left reel 2L. For this reason, even if the BAR replay is won in the internal lottery, the BAR replay is not won unless the stop switch 8L is operated at an appropriate timing.

  Next, the special appearance will be described with reference to FIG. For the special outcome, the symbol of the left reel 2L among the symbol combinations (9) (1) to (9) on any of the winning lines is “red 7 / white 7 / BAR (“ / ”is“ or ” "Meaning") is replaced with "blank (2)" in three types of combinations (blank (2) -blank (1) -red 7 / white 7 / BAR), and the pattern of the right reel 2R is "red 7". / White 7 / BAR "is replaced with" Blank (1) "(Red 7 / White 7 / BAR-Blank (1) -Blank (1)), and the design of the left reel 2L is" Blank (2 ) "And a combination (blank (2) -blank (1) -blank (1)) in which the design of the right reel 2R is replaced with" blank (1) ". In this way, the symbols constituting the special outcome are arranged within 7 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. For this reason, in principle, the special outcome can be stopped at any of the pay lines L1 to L6 regardless of the operation procedure of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  In the present embodiment, the reel control for stopping at any one of the pay lines L1 to L6 in the present embodiment is when any of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won in any gaming state. This is only done when the 9 winning winning combinations are missed. On the other hand, as described above, the special outcome can be stopped at any of the pay lines L1 to L6 regardless of the operation procedure of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Therefore, when any of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won, the symbols constituting the winning nine winning combinations are stopped on any of the winning lines L1 to L6. If this is not possible, the special event can be stopped at any of the winning lines L1 to L6.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, after the special outcome is stopped in the preparation mode, it is controlled to RT. RT is continuously controlled until a big bonus or a regular bonus is won or until a fall replay is won. It should be noted that even if the special game is stopped in a normal game state other than the preparation mode, a bonus, an internal RT, etc., it is not controlled by RT. Further, even if the special outcome is stopped at the RT, the control to the RT is maintained.

  Next, the internal lottery will be described. In the internal lottery, the variable display device 2 determines whether or not each of the winning combinations described above is permitted, that is, whether or not the symbol combination that generates the winning combination is allowed to perform control for aligning with any winning line. Is determined before the display result is derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is operated). In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number generation circuit 42. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the obtained random number for internal lottery, the gaming state, and the determination value of each winning combination determined according to the set value set by the reset / setting switch 38 Depending on the number.

  Here, a lottery target combination determined for each gaming state as an internal lottery target and the number of determination values of the lottery target combination will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing each lottery target combination and the number of determination values acquired based on the gaming state and the set value. The lottery object combination and the number of determination values shown in FIG. 17 are stored in a predetermined storage area assigned to the ROM 41b, for example. In the internal lottery, the number of determination values determined for the lottery subject in accordance with the game state is sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery extracted at the start of the game, and the result of the addition overflows a predetermined value (for example, 65536). Sometimes, it is determined that the winning combination for the lottery is won. If the winning combination is determined, the winning flag for the winning combination is set in the RAM 41c.

  FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the lottery target combination and the number of determination values that are internally drawn when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. In the normal game state, the lottery target is the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, replay, replay + fall replay, replay + fall replay + BAR replay, strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) , Melon, 9-sheet combination (1), 9-sheet combination (2), 9-sheet combination (3), 9-sheet combination (4), 9-sheet combination (5), 9-sheet combination (6), 9-sheet combination (7 ), 9-piece combination (8), and 9-piece combination (9) are sequentially read as lottery targets. Note that “+” is written between winning combinations to indicate that the winning combination is read out simultaneously in the internal lottery. For example, in the case of “replay + falling replay”, it indicates that the replay and the falling replay are simultaneously read out as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery.

  When the set value is 1, when “80” is the regular bonus when the target of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and “80” is the big bonus (2) When “100” is replay, “3860” is replay + tumbling replay, “2560” is replay + tumbling replay + BAR replay, and “2560” is strawberry (1) + strawberry ( 2) “700” is acquired as the number of determination values, “7000” is acquired as a melon, and “1000” is acquired as one of the nine combinations (1) to (9). . FIG. 17A also shows the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the set value is 2 to 4.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the larger the value set as the set value, the larger the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery for the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus. Yes. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery.

  FIGS. 17B to 17D show the game state when the game state is the preparation mode, RT, and internal RT, and in the internal lottery, replay, replay + falling replay, replay + falling replay + BAR replay are lottery. It is a figure which shows the number of judgment values acquired when read as an object combination. When the game state is the preparation mode, RT, and internal RT, the number of determination values acquired in each other than the lottery of replay, replay + falling replay, replay + falling replay + BAR replay is shown in FIG. This is the same as the number of judgment values shown. That is, the number of determination values of each lottery target acquired in the internal lottery when the game state is the preparation mode, RT, and internal medium RT are the replay, replay + falling replay, and replay + shown in FIG. The number of determination values acquired in each internal lottery of the fall replay + BAR replay is determined in the internal lottery of each of the replay, replay + fall replay, replay + fall replay + BAR replay shown in FIGS. It is replaced with the number of values. In addition, when the internal RT is already set, any bonus winning flag such as big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, etc. has already been set. Even in such a case, the already set bonus winning flag is maintained, and the winning bonus winning flag is not reset or updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bonus from being drawn and won again in the internal RT that has already won the bonus.

  FIG. 17B is a diagram showing the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of each of replay, fall replay, and BAR replay when the gaming state is a preparation mode controlled after the bonus ends. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “105” is “replay + falling replay + BAR replay” when the target of the internal lottery is replaying, and “16450” is replay + falling replaying. Sometimes “16450” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  FIG. 17 (c) shows a case where RT is controlled by stopping the special game when the game state is the preparation mode, and is acquired in the internal lottery of each of replay, fall replay, and BAR replay. It is a figure which shows the number of judgment values. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “30000” is “replay + tumbling replay + BAR replay” when the target role of the internal lottery is replay, and “8880” is replay + falling replay. Sometimes “8880” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  FIG. 17D shows a case where the game state is an internal medium RT controlled from when the bonus is won internally until winning, and the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of replay, fall replay, and BAR replay FIG. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “10000” is replay + tumbling replay + BAR replay when the target of the internal lottery is replay, and “5000” is replay + falling replay. Sometimes “5000” is acquired as the number of judgment values.

  Here, the winning rate of the fall replay in each gaming state will be described. The winning rate of fall replay per game is 5120 / 65536≈8% in the normal gaming state, and 32900 / 65536≈50% in the normal mode, based on the total number of fall replay judgment values. 17760 / 65536≈27% when RT, and 10000 / 65536≈15% when inside RT. As a result, the winning rate of the fall replay per game is such that even if the fall replay wins, the game state is maintained and the normal game state is achieved by winning the fall replay than in the case of the internal RT. It is set to be higher in the preparation mode that suffers the disadvantage of being controlled by the system and in the RT mode.

  Further, in the preparation mode, the RT is controlled when the above-mentioned special outcome is stopped. The appearance rate of the special appearance per game in the preparation mode is (9000/65536) × (8/9) ≈12% based on the number of judgment values and the missed rate of the nine-player roles (1) to (9). . That is, in the preparation mode, the winning rate of the fall replay is set to be higher than the appearance rate of the special roll. Therefore, in the preparation mode, it can be said that there is a high possibility of winning the fall replay before the special outcome is stopped.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when paying attention to the winning rate of falling replay per game, the winning rate of falling replay per game is higher in the preparation mode than in RT. It is set to be. Thereby, in the preparation mode, it is possible to further increase the possibility of winning a fall replay and winning a prize as compared with the case of RT. Therefore, for example, in the non-AT preparation mode, it can be said that it is easier to control to the normal gaming state by winning the fall replay than the non-ART.

  On the other hand, in the case of the non-AT preparation mode, if the special roll is stopped first and the luck is controlled to RT fortunately without winning the fall replay, the fall replay win rate is higher than that in the preparation mode. The lower the chance of winning a prize. For this reason, when it is fortunately controlled to RT, the player can have a sense of expectation that the RT will be maintained without winning the fall replay than when in the preparation mode.

  FIG. 17E is a diagram showing the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is a bonus. When the gaming state is a bonus, the lottery target roles are all nine (1) to (9) (all nine types (1) to (9)), strawberry (1) + strawberry (2 ), Melon, nine-piece combination (1), nine-piece combination (2), nine-piece combination (3), nine-piece combination (4), nine-piece combination (5), nine-piece combination (6), nine-piece combination ( 7), 9-piece combination (8), and 9-piece combination (9) are sequentially read out as lottery targets.

  Then, when the set value is 1, “55935” when the target combination of the internal lottery is all nine (1) to (9) and “200” when the combination is strawberry (1), (1) + “strawberry” (2), “100” is determined, “3000” is determined, and “700” is determined when any of the nine roles (1) to (9) is selected. Get as number of values. FIG. 17 (e) also shows the number of determination values of each lottery target acquired in the internal lottery when the set value is 2 to 4. From the number of determination values shown in FIG. 17E, when the gaming state is in bonus, all nine winning combinations (1) to (9) are won with high probability.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.
The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of frames to be drawn according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of the system. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of frames to be pulled in at each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are set to 0 to 20 (see FIG. 3) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (in this embodiment, a perspective window). 3 when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected at the timing (the timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps). This is a table in which the number of frames is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stop control table for the unreacted reel corresponding to the stop reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. .

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. Thereby, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 The lower symbol area).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the winning combination is drawn not to be aligned on the winning line. Create a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn in and perform reel stop control. If none of the roles are won, stop control with a number of frames to be drawn that does not match any of the roles A table is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If the winning combination is not drawn, it will be controlled so that it can be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  If a special role has been carried over from before the previous game and a small role (such as strawberry (1), melon, 9-card role (1)) is won, etc., the winning small role will be 4 frames on the winning line. The number of draws is determined so that the maximum number of draws can be drawn in the range, and for the stop operation position where the selected small role cannot be drawn into the winning line in the range of up to 4 frames, the selected special role is 4 in the winning line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the maximum number of frames can be drawn in the range of frames is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, Control is performed to align and stop them, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within the 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the normal small combination cannot be drawn. As a result, after winning a small role and then winning a special role, the special role is won, and compared to the case where the special role is preferentially won, Since the special combination can be won, the player's medal can be increased as much as possible before the special combination is won, and reel control advantageous to the player is performed.

  For example, when a special combination and a melon with a payout number of more than 3 are selected, reel control is performed preferentially, which is a 6-plus increase by winning a special combination before winning the special combination, which is advantageous to the player. . When a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the small combination.

  In the reel control, an example is described in which reel control is performed in which a small role is preferentially aligned on a winning line over a special role. However, not all small roles are preferentially aligned over a special role. A small role in which medals greater than or equal to the number of wagers are paid out (in the case of 3 bets, a small role in which 3 or more medals are paid out, for example, a melon that pays out 9 medals by winning, 9), etc. (hereinafter also referred to as a normal small combination), the reel control is preferentially arranged, and a small combination in which medals less than the bet number are paid out (when the bet number is 3, small medals less than 3 are paid out) For a combination, for example, when a single combination that pays out one medal by winning is set as a winning combination, the special combination is given priority on the winning line. It may be configured to perform the reel control to align. Thereby, even if winning is made, it is possible to prevent the reel control from being preferentially aligned even for the small role that is disadvantageous for the player because the payout is less than the bet amount.

  Next, when a special role and a replaying role are won at the same time (such as a big bonus (1) + replay), such as when a replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over before the previous game Then, a stop control table in which the number of drawn-in frames is determined so as to draw the selected re-gamer to the winning line in the range of four frames to the maximum is created, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When multiple types of re-playing players are won at the same time (such as replay + falling replay (the same applies when winning a special role), as shown in FIG. 18 (a), A re-gamer determined on the winning line according to the type of game player and whether the first reeled-out reel (first stopped reel) is a left reel, middle reel, or right reel Control is performed to stop evenly in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. FIG. 18A is a diagram for explaining the reel control when winning the fall replay.

  For example, when the replay + falling replay is won and the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, control is performed to stop the combination of the falling replays in any winning line among the selected re-game players. As shown in FIG. 3, symbols constituting the fall replay are arranged at intervals of 7 frames or less on each reel, and L1 to L6 are set as the winning lines, so that the replay + fall replay is won. When the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the reel control is performed so that the falling replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  On the other hand, when the replay + falling replay is won and the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the replay combination of the selected replaying players is stopped on one winning line. To do. As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the replay are arranged at intervals of 7 frames or less on each reel, and L1 to L6 are set as the winning lines. When the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the reel control is performed so that the replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In addition, when replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won and the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the combination of the falling replays among the selected replaying players is aligned with any winning line and stopped. To control. For this reason, when the replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won and the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C is first stopped, the falling replay is performed regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Reel control is performed so that will always win.

  On the other hand, when the replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won and the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, control is performed to align and stop the combination of replays on any winning line among the selected re-game players. . For this reason, when the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time when the replay + tumbling replay + BAR replay is won, the replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Reel control is performed.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the first stop reel for avoiding the fall replay winning and making the replay win different depending on whether replay + falling replay is won or whether replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won. The operation procedure (avoidance procedure) can be made different.

  Further, when the fall replay is won when the production state is not AT, the type of replay won at the same time as the fall replay cannot be specified. For this reason, the replay winning is avoided by avoiding the falling replay winning with the probability of 1/2, but the falling replay is won with the remaining probability of 1/2.

  On the other hand, when the fall state replay is won when the production state is AT, the type of replay won at the same time as the fall replay can be specified. For this reason, as long as the operation is not mistaken, the first stop can be made so that the replay winning is always avoided while avoiding the falling replay winning.

  As described above, since the winning rate of falling replay per game when in the preparation mode is 50%, the winning rate of falling replay is 25% in consideration of the reel control. Therefore, the average number of games in the non-AT preparation mode that can be digested without winning a fall replay is about 4 games from the fall replay win rate. As a result, it is possible to prevent the preparation mode from being continuously controlled over a long period of time even though the effect state is not controlled by the AT.

  In addition, the winning rate for the fall replay, particularly during the preparation mode, is still higher than 12% of the appearance rate of the special event that triggers the RT control. For this reason, in the preparation mode, even if the probability of accidentally dropping the fall replay is taken into account, it can be said that there is a high possibility of winning the fall replay before the special outcome is stopped. For this reason, when in the non-AT preparation mode, the internal winning situation cannot be grasped, and the fall replay is performed before the special outcome is stopped based on the winning rate of the fall fall and the appearance rate of the special outcome. Since the possibility of winning and winning is increased, it can be easily controlled to the normal gaming state and difficult to be controlled by RT.

  On the other hand, when in the AT preparation mode, the internal winning situation can be grasped, and even if the winning rate of the falling replay has a high probability, the falling replay winning can be intentionally avoided. For this reason, when in the AT preparation mode, it is possible to avoid the control to the normal gaming state, and it is possible to control the RT as a result by stopping the special game.

  That is, a preparation mode is provided as a previous game state controlled to RT advantageous for the player, and when the performance state in the preparation mode is not controlled by the AT, it is easy to control from the preparation mode to the normal game state. Thus, it is difficult to control to RT, and when the effect state in the preparation mode is controlled to AT, RT can be surely controlled. For this reason, the difference in the degree of advantage for the player can be increased depending on whether or not the performance state in the preparation mode is controlled by the AT, so that a sense of expectation that the performance state is controlled by the AT can be given. It can be increased effectively and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, since the win rate of the fall replay per game during RT is 27%, the winning rate of the fall replay is 13.5% in consideration of the reel control.

  Therefore, the average number of non-ART games that can be digested without winning a fall replay is about 7.4 games based on the fall replay win rate. As a result, it is possible to prevent the RT from being continuously controlled over a long period of time even though the performance state is not controlled by the AT, and it is difficult to maintain the RT, and it is easy to control the normal gaming state. can do.

  On the other hand, when it is ART, the internal winning situation can be grasped, and even if the winning rate of the falling replay has a high probability, the falling replay winning can be intentionally avoided. For this reason, when it is ART, it can avoid being controlled to a normal game state, and RT can be maintained as a result.

  That is, even if the non-preparation mode is fortunately controlled to non-ART, it is difficult to maintain RT by making it easy to be controlled in the normal gaming state, and RT can be reliably continued when in ART. For this reason, the difference in the degree of advantage for the player can be increased depending on whether or not the performance state in RT is controlled by the AT, so that a sense of expectation for the fact that the performance state is controlled by the AT is effective. Can increase the interest of the game.

  When multiple types of small roles are won at the same time (strawberry (1) + strawberry (2), all nine roles (1) to (9), etc.), the winning line will be displayed according to the timing of the stop operation. In addition, the symbols that make up the winning small combination that can be pulled in within the maximum four-frame drawing range are aligned and stopped. When all 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) are won, any one of the combinations of 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) shown in FIG. Reel control is performed to win a prize. When winning strawberry (1) + strawberry (2), either one of the symbol combinations of strawberry (1) and strawberry (2) shown in FIG. 15 will be awarded regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Reel control is performed.

  In this embodiment, when winning a strawberry, reel control is performed to draw the symbols constituting the winning strawberry for the left reel 2L on the winning line in a drawing range of up to 4 frames, and a special reel is used for the middle reel 2C. Reel control is performed. FIG. 18B is a diagram for explaining the special reel control of the middle reel 2C when winning a strawberry.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 18 (b), symbol number 5 is obtained on condition that at least strawberry (1) is won (strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) winning or strawberry (1) winning alone). Special reel control is performed to draw the “Deca (1) (upper half of the star without slashes)” to the middle in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. In addition, on the condition that strawberry (2) is selected (strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) selected), the symbol “Deca (2) (the lower half of the star without diagonal lines)” of symbol number 4 Special reel control is performed to pull in the middle stage with a maximum of 4 frames. When winning the strawberry (2), if the symbol number 4 and the symbol number 5 can be drawn to the middle in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the symbol number 4 symbol Special reel control is performed in which the number 5 symbol is given priority over the middle stage. When the strawberry is not won, the reel control for stopping the symbols other than the symbols of symbols 4 and 5 on the middle reel 2C in the middle, except for the case where the reel control for generating another winning combination is performed. Done.

  For this reason, when the stop operation is performed so as to stop the middle reel 2L at the timing when the symbol of symbol number 4 is stopped in the middle row, the symbol of symbol number 4 stops in the middle row and other than strawberry (1) and strawberry (2) The player can recognize that the strawberry (2) has been won when the winning of the role of is not generated, the symbol of the symbol number 5 stops in the middle, and the strawberry (1) and strawberry (2 ) When the winning of a role other than) has not occurred, the player can recognize that at least strawberry (1) has been won, and when the other symbols are stopped in the middle row, the strawberry is won. It is possible to make the player recognize that it was not.

  Note that when the strawberry (1) or strawberry (2) is won during the bonus, the notification promotion condition is established. For this reason, in the middle reel 2C, the fact that the symbol number 4 or 5 is stopped in the middle stage and the winning of the role other than the strawberry (1) and the strawberry (2) does not occur is informed that the notification promotion condition is established. can do.

  On the game control board 40 side, the internal lottery is performed as described above, and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R stop rotating according to the result and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a prize is generated. It becomes. As a result of winning a prize, a medal is paid out or a game state is transferred as a payout. Thus, depending on the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side, an original effect is performed on the effect control board 90 side. It is. In order to perform such an effect, the sub CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 must be able to recognize the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side, but is sent from the main CPU 41a of the game control board 40. Various effects are performed based on the above-described commands related to the progress of the game.

  In order to perform the performance, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 has various counters, an area for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning command. Area for storing winning status, combination of display results derived to reels 2L, 2C, 2R, information indicating presence / absence of winning, game state applied in game running on game control board 40 ( The winning situation and the gaming state are also provided in the RAM 91c twice.

  Among the effects executed by the control of the sub-control unit 91, as an effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 based on a command output to the display control circuit 92, a game according to the gaming state and the stage described above There is a production.

  The game production is the demonstration production described above, the continuous production that informs whether or not the bonus is won, and after the fact that the bonus is won and the bonus line is given priority over the bonus. Replays that are controlled to be drawn in, or a small role from a symbol (or symbol combination) that has been elected to a small role but stopped on some reels, that is a chance timing to win a bonus without winning a small character A chance effect that informs you that it is a chance timing that you can win a winning combination that you can not win the winning combination and win the winning bonus, is executed until the game state ends after winning the bonus Bonus effects, gaming state effects according to gaming state, high probability state, and notification that points were awarded during bonus Point awarding effect, including navigation effect to be executed such as when the effect state is controlled to the AT. It should be noted that image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in the CGROM.

  The game effect is controlled and executed by the VDP 141 of the display control circuit 92 by outputting an effect data write command, an effect start command, an end command, and the like to the display control circuit 92. When the VDP 141 receives the effect data write command, the VDP 141 reads the effect data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. When an effect start command is received, if effect data is written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155, it is written by the drawing circuit 154 frame by frame in each frame period until the effect end command is received. The image data corresponding to the effect data is expanded in the frame buffer memory 156 and output to the liquid crystal display 51 by the display circuit 157.

  Data for displaying an effect image on the liquid crystal display 51 under the control of the VDP 141 is stored in advance in the CGROM as effect data. The effect data is prepared for each of a plurality of types of stages, and the effect data written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on the write command from the sub-control unit 91 corresponds to the stage at that time. Will be. Further, the effect data of the history display effect and the effect data of the demonstration effect are stored in the CGROM in advance.

  In the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining the display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone. For this reason, the ROM 91b stores in advance a table showing all symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. With reference to this table, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped on the stop symbol table. The symbol is registered. The sub-control unit 91 produces an effect based on the registration information of the stop symbol table.

  Next, a process executed by the main control unit 41 and a process executed by the sub control unit 91 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  First, processing executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game process one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must be in a state where the game can be progressed first. In order to be able to advance the game, for example, the set value work is stored in the set value work with the set value in the normal range with the main control unit 41 including the main CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c. The condition is that there is no abnormality. When the game is ready to proceed, game processing is repeated in the slot machine 1 game by game. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described. The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  The game control process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 7. A BET process for instructing the substantial start of the game is performed. If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same number of bets as in the previous game (3 in this embodiment) is automatically set by the flag during the replay game (the flag during the replay game is deleted at this stage) ). In the BET process, a BET command is transmitted to the effect control board 90 every time a bet number is set.

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to do so. In the lottery process, an internal winning command indicating the setting status of the winning flag in the RAM 41c is transmitted to the effect control board 90. Further, in the lottery process, when one of the big bonuses (1), (2), and the regular bonus is won, a process for controlling the internal medium RT (for example, the value of the game state flag is set to the value of the internal medium RT flag). Set value etc.).

  When the lottery process is completed, the reel rotation process is performed next. In the reel rotation process, the reel motor is operated on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game. 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 33SL, 33SC, 33SR after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) is established from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Is enabled. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. When the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started and stopped, a reel rotation command and a reel stop command are transmitted to the effect control board 90, respectively.

  When the driving of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning determination process is performed for determining whether any of the above-mentioned role symbols is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping. If it is determined in this winning determination process that any combination has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 40 are performed. Here, a winning determination command indicating a winning determination result is sent to the effect control board 90. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that one of the big bonuses (1), (2), or the regular bonus is won, a process for controlling the corresponding bonus (for example, the value of the game state flag is set). The corresponding bonus value is set).

  Further, in the winning determination process, when it is determined that the player has won the fall replay during the preparation mode or RT, the process for controlling to the normal gaming state (for example, the value of the gaming state flag is set to the value of the normal gaming state). Set value etc.). Further, when it is determined that no winning has occurred and the special outcome is stopped at any of the winning lines L1 to L6 during the preparation mode, a process for controlling to RT ( For example, the value of RT is set as the value of the gaming state flag).

  In the present embodiment, nine winning combinations (1) to (9) that trigger special special event suspension are read out independently as other lottery winning combinations without being read out as the lottery target combination, and the internal winning combination is made. Is done. For this reason, when the special game stops, no winnings can occur. However, the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) that trigger the special event stop may be read out as a lottery target combination at the same time as other winning combinations, and an internal winning may be performed. In this case, there is a possibility that another winning combination won at the same time may occur even when the special event stops. If the special event is stopped and a winning of another winning combination occurs, the profit associated with the occurrence of the winning of the other winning combination is granted, and in the preparation mode, RT It may be one that controls.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout opening 9. In addition, various processes that are not related to winning a prize (for example, processing related to bonus end control (including determination of establishment of bonus end conditions), elimination of a carry-over flag (winning flag for small roles, etc.) without carryover), etc. are also performed. .

  In the payout process, the winning flags for the big bonus and the regular bonus stored in the special work are not deleted. As a result, the winning flags for the big bonus and the regular bonus are carried over to the next game until the winning bonus is won. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 performs the transition of the game state among the preparation mode, RT, normal game state, internal RT, and bonus, and the progress of the game In response to this, a command is transmitted to the effect control board 90. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 performs various processes based on the command received from the game control board 40.

  Next, processing executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described. The sub-control unit 91 first executes a predetermined effect initial setting process, and after performing an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 to the state at the time of power supply stop, Repeat the update process.

  In the sub-control unit 91, an interrupt for controlling the progress of the effect is generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt flag of the RAM 91c is set to the ON state by the reset / interrupt controller. Then, the effect control interruption process is executed. In the effect control interrupt process, the contents of the internal register are saved, the effect backup process is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, the data required for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up. Is done. Further, command analysis processing for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed, and predetermined effect control processing is executed. By this effect control process, various effects such as displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating sound from the speakers 53 and 54 according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 are performed. In addition, various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the side of the effect control board 90, and then the contents of the saved register are restored, and then the effect control interrupt process ends. In the effect control process executed in the effect control interrupt process, the sub-control unit 91 gives a probability state control process for controlling the probability state as shown in FIG. Therefore, an AT control process for controlling the effect state to the AT according to the point related process, a game state, etc., and a game effect execution process for executing the above-described game effect according to the game state, etc. are performed.

  The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs the first AT lottery by executing the first AT lottery process included in the AT control process. In the first AT lottery process, when it is determined that the bonus is won based on the internal winning command from the main control unit 41, the first AT lottery is performed according to the probability corresponding to the total number of points actually granted after the end of the previous bonus. Is executed. Further, in the first AT lottery process, when it is determined that the bonus is ended based on the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, the first AT lottery is executed according to the probability corresponding to the total number of points given in the bonus. Is done.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining lottery conditions that trigger the execution of the first AT lottery. FIGS. 20 and 21 are diagrams for explaining tables referred to in the first AT lottery.

  In the first AT lottery, as shown in FIG. 19, when it is determined that the bonus has been won, the bonus winning table shown in FIG. 20 is referred to, and when it is determined that the bonus has ended, the bonus end table shown in FIG. , The number of navigation stock is determined according to the probability corresponding to the total number of points awarded. Whether or not a bonus has been won is specified by, for example, an internal winning command from the main control unit 41. Further, whether or not the bonus has ended is specified from a gaming state command from the main control unit 41, for example.

  The number of navigation stocks indicates a period during which the AT can be controlled. By consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stock by 1, the game is controlled by the AT while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50), and the navigation effect can be executed during that time. Accordingly, it can be said that the greater the determined number of navigation stocks, the higher the degree of advantage for the player because the AT is controlled over a longer period. In the present embodiment, the number of navigation stocks determined in the first AT lottery based on the bonus winning, the number of navigation stocks determined in the second AT lottery based on the bonus winning described later, and the navigation stock determined in the first AT lottery based on the end of the bonus. According to the total number with the stock number, the AT is controlled after the bonus is over.

  When the number of navigation stocks of 1 or more is determined in the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery, the sub-control unit 91 indicates AT and indicates the number of navigation stocks (the total number of the first AT lottery and the second AT lottery). The flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. Based on the AT flag in the RAM 91c, the sub-control unit 91 specifies whether or not to control to AT, and specifies the remaining number of navigation stocks.

  When the number of navigation stocks is given when the AT flag indicating that the vehicle is AT is set, the number of navigation stocks assigned this time may be added to the number of stocks specified from the AT flag. It may be rewritten to the number of navigation stocks granted this time.

  For example, when the AT flag indicating that the AT is set and the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery is performed by the bonus winning, the AT flag corresponding to the result of the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery Updated to The update to the AT flag corresponding to the result of the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery means, for example, that the current first AT lottery or the second AT is added to the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. It may be possible to rewrite an AT flag that specifies the number of navigation stock added by adding the number of navigation stocks according to the lottery result, and the AT flag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c may be used for the first AT lottery or It may be rewritten to an AT flag indicating the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the result of the second AT lottery. Any method may be used as long as the current AT flag can be specified according to the result of the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery.

  In addition, when the number of navigation stocks is given after the AT flag indicating that the first AT lottery is performed and the AT is set by the bonus winning, and the number of navigation stocks is given, the AT flag for specifying the number of navigation stocks added and added To be rewritten.

  For example, after the AT flag indicating that the first AT lottery is performed and the AT is set by the bonus winning, for example, the second AT lottery by the bonus winning or the first AT lottery by the end of the bonus is performed and further one or more. When the number of navigation stocks is determined, the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 91c is added to the result of the second AT lottery by the bonus winning and the result of the first AT lottery by the end of the bonus. The corresponding number of navigation stocks is added and added to the AT flag that specifies the number of navigation stocks.

  The case where the bonus winning table shown in FIG. 20 is referred to in the first AT lottery will be described. If the total number of points granted outside the bonus is “0-2” when the bonus is won (hereinafter also referred to as the total number of normal points granted), the number of navigation stocks is 90%. Navistock number was determined to be 1 at a rate of 5%, Navistock number was determined to be 3 at a rate of 2%, Navistock number was determined to be 5 at a rate of 2%, 1% The first AT lottery at the time of winning the bonus is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 in proportion.

  When the total number of granted points is “3-5”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 50%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 15%. 3 is determined, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 2%.

  When the total number of granted points is “6-9”, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at 70%, the navigation stock number is determined to be 3 at 20%, and the navigation stock number is at 5%. 5 is determined, the number of navigation stock is determined to be 10 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stock is determined to be 20 at a rate of 2%, the first AT lottery at the time of winning the bonus is performed.

  When the total number of granted points is “10”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 70%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 10%, and the number of navigation stocks is 10 at a rate of 10%. The first AT lottery at the time of winning the bonus is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at a rate of 10%. As will be described later, the upper limit of the total number of normal granted points is set to “10”.

  As described above, the bonus winning table of FIG. 20 is determined such that the larger the total number of granted points, the higher the number of navigation stocks that is 1 or more at a higher rate, that is, the more advantageous for the player. AT lottery at the time of winning the bonus. Further, when the total number of granted points is 6 or more, the number of navigation stock is always determined to be 1 or more. For this reason, when the total number of granted points is 6 or more, the AT is always controlled after the bonus is over.

  Therefore, it can be said that the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by controlling the AT at a higher rate and determining the number of navigation stocks at a higher rate as the total number of granted points increases. As a result, the greater the total number of points recognized by the player, the greater the sense of expectation that AT will be controlled and the acquisition of a larger number of navigation stocks, and the interest of the game will be improved. it can.

  Next, a case where the bonus end time table shown in FIG. 21 is referred to in the first AT lottery will be described. If the total number of points granted during the bonus and the total number of points granted at the end of the bonus (hereinafter also referred to as the total number of bonus points granted) is “0 to 1”, the navigation stock has a ratio of 95%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the number is determined to be 0, the number of navigation stock is determined to be 1 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stock is determined to be 3 at a rate of 2%.

  When the total number of bonus points awarded is “2-3”, the navigation stock number is determined to be 0 at a rate of 80%, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at a rate of 15%, and the navigation stock is a rate of 4%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the number is determined to be 3 and the navigation stock number is determined to be 5 at a rate of 1%.

  When the total number of bonus points granted is “4”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 60%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 25%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined at a rate of 10%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 5 at a rate of 4%, and the navigation stock number is determined to be 20 at a rate of 1%.

  When the total number of bonus points given is “5”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 70%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 10%, and the number of navigation stocks is increased at a rate of 10%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 20 at a rate of 10%. As will be described later, the upper limit of the total number of bonus points granted is set to “5”.

  In this way, in the bonus end table of FIG. 21, the larger the total number of bonus points granted, the higher the percentage of navigation stock that is determined to be 1 or more, that is, the more advantageous to the player. Thus, the first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed. Further, when the total number of bonus points awarded is 5, the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 3 or more. For this reason, when the total number of bonus points awarded is 5, the AT is always controlled after the bonus is over.

  Therefore, it can be said that the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by controlling the AT at a higher rate and determining the higher number of navigation stocks at a higher rate as the total number of bonus points granted increases. . As a result, the greater the total number of points recognized by the player, the greater the sense of expectation that AT will be controlled and the acquisition of a larger number of navigation stocks, and the interest of the game will be improved. it can. Further, even if the total number of points recognized by the player is small, the points are notified by performing a notification lottery as will be described later, so points that are greater than the total number of recognized points are actually given. There is a possibility that the expectation to be controlled by the AT and to obtain a larger number of navigation stocks can be sustained.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 21 by the first AT lottery process performed when the sub-control unit 91 wins the bonus or ends the bonus. Done.

  The points related to the probability determined to be controlled by the AT in the first AT lottery are given and managed by the sub-control unit 91 by executing the point related processing included in the effect control processing. Further, the point-related processing is executed by the sub-control unit 91, whereby the above-described point giving effect is executed. FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining point-related processing executed by the sub-control unit 91.

  First, in S1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined point grant condition is satisfied. FIG. 23A is a diagram for explaining a point granting condition that can be established when the probability state is a high probability state other than the bonus, and FIG. 23B is a point that can be established during the bonus. It is a figure for demonstrating provision conditions.

  First, referring to FIG. 23 (a), when it is not a bonus and is in a high probability state, it is established on the condition that melon winning or strawberry winning is taken. More specifically, when a melon is won in a state other than a bonus and in a high probability state, the point granting condition is satisfied on the condition that, for example, a predetermined lottery using a random number extracted from a random counter is won. . For example, the probability of winning in the predetermined lottery is set to 25% when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and is set to 50% when the gaming state is other than the normal gaming state. That is, even when the melon is won in the high probability state, the point granting condition is established at a higher rate when the game state is other than the normal game state than when the game state is the normal game state. Therefore, it can be said that the player is more advantageous when the player is in the preparation mode or RT, for example, than in the normal gaming state, in that the point granting condition is easily established.

  As will be described later, points that are awarded when the point granting condition is established by winning a melon when it is other than a bonus and in a high probability state can be notified according to the result of a predetermined notification lottery.

  In addition, when a strawberry is won in a high probability state other than the bonus, the point granting condition is always satisfied. For this reason, at least a predetermined number (for example, 1) of points has been awarded for points given when a strawberry is won and the point granting condition is satisfied when a high probability state other than a bonus is established, as will be described later. To be notified.

  Next, referring to FIG. 23 (b), during the bonus, it is established on condition that melon is won or that nine winning combinations are won and won. More specifically, when a melon is won while a bonus is being awarded, for example, a point granting condition is established on the condition that the player wins by a predetermined lottery using a random number extracted from a random counter. The probability of winning in the predetermined lottery is set to 50%, for example.

  In addition, as will be described later, the points awarded when the point granting condition is established by winning a melon during the bonus can be notified according to the result of a predetermined notification lottery.

  In addition, when a bonus is being awarded, a point granting condition is always satisfied when a winning combination is won for nine winning combinations. As described later, at least a predetermined number (for example, 1) of points will be awarded for points awarded when a bonus is awarded and a point granting condition is established when a winning combination is awarded to nine winning combinations. You will be notified.

  In the present embodiment, when a bonus is being awarded, information that can specify that one of the nine winning combinations has been won is notified (for example, “9 winning combinations”). May be displayed). " Thereby, in the game in which the information is notified during the bonus, it is possible to add an interest such as predicting which 9 winning combinations the player has won.

  In addition, when the point granting condition is always satisfied by winning, it is not limited to notifying that a predetermined number of points have been granted, but accurately notifying the granted points determined in S2, which will be described later. May be.

  Returning to FIG. 22, if it is not determined in S1 that the point granting condition corresponding to the state shown in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1 that the point granting condition is satisfied, in S2, a grant point that can be given to the player is set.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining a table for determining grant points in S2. When the point granting condition is satisfied when it is not a bonus, as shown in the non-bonus column of FIG. 24, the point to be given is determined to be 1 point at a rate of 50%, and to 2 points at a rate of 20%. It is determined to be 3 points at a rate of 20% and 5 points at a rate of 10%.

  When the point granting condition is satisfied while the bonus is in effect, as shown in the bonus column of FIG. 24, the point is determined to be 1 point at a rate of 85%, and 2 points at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be 3 points at a rate of 4% and 5 points at a rate of 1%.

  In this way, more points are determined as the granted points at a higher rate when the point granting condition is established during the bonus than when the point granting condition is established during the bonus.

  In addition, you may comprise so that a grant point may be determined in a different ratio according to whether it is during AT when point grant conditions are satisfied. More specifically, when the point granting condition is established during the non-AT, a higher percentage is determined as the awarded point when established during the non-AT. Also good. Accordingly, the first AT lottery can be performed more advantageously for the player when not in AT than in AT, and the interest of the game during non-AT can be improved.

  In S2 of FIG. 22, a grant point is determined with reference to the table shown in FIG. 24, and grant point information for specifying the determined grant point is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The sub-control unit 91 specifies a grant point resulting from the establishment of the current point grant condition based on the grant point information in the RAM 91c.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which it is determined whether or not the point granting condition is satisfied in S1, and the granted point is determined in S2 when the condition is satisfied. With regard to the determination of the points and the grant points, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that whether or not the points are awarded in one lottery and the grant points are determined. For example, it may be configured to determine any of points 0 to 5 when the player is in a high probability state other than the bonus and wins a melon in the normal gaming state. In this case, when the point is determined to be 0, no point is given.

  In S3, it is determined whether or not the current point grant condition that triggered the point grant is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted. That is, when the point granting conditions this time are conditions other than the bonus shown in FIG. 23A and established by winning a strawberry when the probability is high, or when the bonus shown in FIG. It is determined whether any of the conditions established by winning and winning the nine winning combinations alone.

  In S3, when it is determined that the point granting condition is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted, the process proceeds to S8 described later in order to notify that a predetermined number of points have been granted. . In the present embodiment, for example, the point “1” is determined as the notification point.

  On the other hand, in S3, when it is not determined that the point granting condition is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted, the determination and notification of whether or not to notify that points have been granted The process proceeds to S4 in order to make a notice lottery for determining the number of points.

  In S4, a difference number notification lottery is performed. The difference number corresponding notice lottery means that the total number of points actually granted after the previous first AT lottery is established until the current point granting condition is satisfied, and the current point granting condition after the previous first AT lottery is established. Depending on the difference from the total number of points that have been informed until the establishment, a lottery to determine whether or not to provide the granted points set in S2 when the current point grant condition is established, and the granted points set in S2 It includes a lottery for determining whether or not to report accurately, and a lottery for determining how many points are lower when the granted points set in S2 are not accurately reported. In S4, the difference number is calculated from the total number of granted points (updated in S10) and the total number of notification points (updated in S9) described later. Specifically, the difference number is a value obtained by subtracting the total number of notification points from the total number of granted points.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining a table for performing the difference number notification lottery. In the difference number correspondence notifying lottery in the present embodiment, first, referring to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 25A, a lottery is performed as to whether or not points are to be notified according to the difference number.

  When the difference number is “0”, it is determined to notify at 30% of the fact that the points have been granted in accordance with the setting of the granted points at S2, and not to notify at the rate of 70%. The When the difference number is “1”, it is determined to notify that a point has been granted in S2 at the rate of 40%, and not to be notified at a rate of 60%. The

  When the difference number is “2”, it is determined to notify the fact that the points have been provided in S2 at the rate of 50% and not to be notified at the rate of 50%. The When the difference number is “3 or more”, it is determined to notify 70% of the fact that the points have been provided in accordance with the setting of the granted points in S2, and not to notify at the rate of 30%. Is done.

  As described above, the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 25A is determined not to notify a higher rate as the difference number is smaller, and is notified as a higher rate as the difference number is larger. To be decided. Thereby, when the difference number is already large, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large by not being further notified.

  When it is decided to notify by referring to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 25A, the granted points set in S2 with reference to the difference number correspondence table B in FIG. Depending on the difference, a lottery for determining whether or not to report the given point accurately and a lottery for determining the number of points to be notified when the given point is not reported correctly are performed. In the case where the notification is not performed accurately, the notification point is determined from the points that are less advantageous to the player in the first AT lottery than the awarded points, that is, the points that are less than the granted points.

  When the granted point is “1”, the point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 100% as a notification point regardless of the difference number. When the granted point is “2” and the difference number is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be point “1” at a rate of 30%, and point “2” at a rate of 70%. Determined. When the granted point is “2” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be point “1” at a rate of 20%, and point “2” at a rate of 80%. To be determined.

  When the granted point is “3” and the difference is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 10%, and the point “2” at a rate of 20%. ”And the point“ 3 ”at a rate of 70%. When the granted point is “3” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be point “2” at a rate of 10%, and point “3” at a rate of 90%. To be determined.

  When the granted point is “5” and the difference number is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be “2” at a rate of 10%, and the point “3” at a rate of 20%. ”And the point“ 5 ”at a rate of 70%. When the granted point is “5” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be “3” at a rate of 10%, and the point “5” at a rate of 90%. To be determined.

  In this way, in the difference number correspondence table B in FIG. 25 (b), the point to be notified is determined so that it is notified that a smaller number of points than a given point is given at a higher rate as the difference number is smaller. The point to be notified is determined so that the higher the difference number is, the higher the proportion is given, or the fact that a point closer to the given point is given. In addition, the more points are given, the higher the rate is. As a result, when the difference number is already large, or when a large number of given points are likely to cause the difference number, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large due to the notification of even fewer points.

  In the difference number corresponding notification lottery according to the present embodiment, the example of determining whether to notify using the tables of FIGS. 25A and 25B and the notification point has been described. Only the table of 25 (a) may be used to determine only whether or not to notify according to the difference number, and when it is determined to notify, the grant point set in S2 may be accurately notified. . Moreover, you may comprise so that an alerting | reporting point may be determined according to a difference number using only the table of FIG.25 (b).

  Returning to FIG. 22, in S <b> 5, it is determined whether or not it is determined to notify that the points have been given by the difference number corresponding notification lottery of S <b> 4. When it is determined to notify, the process proceeds to S8 described later in order to notify that the point determined in S4 has been given. On the other hand, when it is not determined to notify in S5, the process proceeds to S6.

  In S6, a total number notification lottery is performed. The total number corresponding notice lottery refers to the granted points set in S2 when the present point grant condition is satisfied according to the total number of granted points (the total number of normal granted points other than the bonus, the total number of bonus granted points during the bonus). A lottery for determining whether or not to be notified, a lottery for determining whether or not to accurately notify the grant points set in S2, and how many points are to be notified when the grant points set in S2 are not accurately reported Includes lottery. In the case where the notification is not performed accurately, the notification point is determined from the points that are less advantageous to the player in the first AT lottery than the awarded points, that is, the points that are less than the granted points.

  It should be noted that the total number of points that are actually granted after the first AT lottery last time until the present point granting condition is satisfied is specified from the total number of granted points described later.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining a table for performing the total number notification lottery. In the total number correspondence notifying lottery in the present embodiment, first, referring to the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 26A, a lottery is performed as to whether or not points are to be notified according to the total number of points actually assigned. It is.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “0 to 1”, the granted points are set in S2. It is determined to notify that the points have been given at a rate of 80% and not to notify at a rate of 20%.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “3-5”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “2-3”, the granted points are set in S2. It is determined to notify that a point has been given at a rate of 50% and not to notify at a rate of 50%.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “4 to 5”, the granted points are set in S2. It is determined to notify that a point has been given at a rate of 10% and not to notify at a rate of 90%.

  As described above, the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 26A is determined to notify that a point has been given at a higher rate as the total number of given points is smaller, and the total number of given points is The larger the number, the higher the ratio is determined not to be notified. Thereby, when only a small number of points are given, the player can be relieved to recognize that a small number of points are given by notifying at a high rate. On the other hand, by not being notified at a high rate when a large number of points are given, it is possible to increase the possibility that more points are actually given than the points recognized by the player from the notification points. , Can maintain a sense of expectation.

  If it is decided to notify by referring to the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 26A, further refer to the total number correspondence table B in FIG. Depending on the total number of points granted, a lottery for determining whether or not to accurately report the given points and a lottery for determining the number of points to be notified when the given points are not reported correctly are performed. It is.

  When the granted point is “1”, the point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 100% as a notification point regardless of the total number of given points. When the number of points given is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 70%.

  When the number of points awarded is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 50%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 50%.

  When the number of points awarded is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 90%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 10%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 10%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 20%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 70%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 20%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 50%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 50%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 20%.

  When the number of points given is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “3” is determined at a rate of 10%, and the point “5” is determined at a rate of 90%.

  When the number of points given is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, 10% of the points are determined as “1”, 10% of the points are determined as “2”, 30% of the points are determined as “3”, 50% of the points are determined as “5” It is determined.

  When the number of points awarded is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, , 30% of the points are determined as “1”, 30% of the points are determined as “2”, 30% of the points are determined as “3”, and 10% of the points are determined as “5”. It is determined.

  In this way, the total number correspondence table B in FIG. 26 (b) is assigned so that the smaller the total number of points given, the higher the percentage that is given or points closer to the given points. The point to be notified is determined so that the fact that a smaller number of points than the granted points are given at a higher rate is notified as the total number of the given points is larger. Thereby, when only a small number of points are given, it is possible to reassure the player by recognizing that a small number of points are given by accurately informing at a high rate. On the other hand, when a large number of points are given, a point that is less than the given points is notified at a high rate, so that more points are actually given than the points recognized by the player from the notification points. Can increase the possibility of being in the future, and can sustain expectations.

  In the total lot notification lottery according to the present embodiment, an example in which notification is made using the tables shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B and an example in which notification points are determined has been described. It may be configured to determine only whether or not to notify in accordance with the total number using only the table of (a), and to accurately notify the granted point set in S2 when it is determined to notify. Moreover, you may comprise so that an alerting | reporting point may be determined according to the total number using only the table of FIG.26 (b).

  Moreover, although the example which performs the difference number corresponding | compatible notification lottery and the total number corresponding | compatible notification lottery was demonstrated as the notification lottery in this Embodiment, you may comprise not only this but only any one. Further, the example of performing the total number corresponding notification lottery after performing the difference number corresponding notification lottery has been described, but the difference number corresponding notification lottery may be performed after performing the total number corresponding notification lottery.

  In the notification lottery according to the present embodiment, the example of determining whether to notify and the notification point according to the difference number and the total number has been described. However, the notification lottery is not limited thereto, and the difference number and the total number are determined. Regardless, it may be configured to determine whether or not to notify and the notification point according to the grant point set in S2.

  Returning to FIG. 22, in S <b> 7, it is determined whether or not it is determined to notify that the points have been given by the total number corresponding notification lottery of S <b> 6. When it is determined to notify, the process proceeds to S8 described later in order to notify that the point determined in S6 has been given. On the other hand, if it is not determined to notify in S7, the process proceeds to S10 without performing the process for notifying that the points have been granted.

  In S8, the notification process for performing the point provision effect which alert | reports that the point was provided is performed. In the notification process, when it is determined YES in S3, for example, information that can specify that point “1” has been granted is notified as a point grant effect (at the start or end of the game, “Acquire Point 1! To display a message such as “!”. Also, in the notification process, information that can specify that the point determined in S4 or S6 is given as a point granting effect is notified (for example, when notifying that the point “2” has been given) Then, at the start or end of the game, a process for displaying a message such as “Acquire Point 2!” Is performed.

  Note that the point granting effect is not limited to that executed in the above-described manner, and may be executed in any manner as long as the effect is executed in an aspect corresponding to the number of points given. .

  In S9, the notification point total number information for specifying the total number of notification points, which is the total number of points notified to the player by the process of S8 after the previous first AT lottery, is updated. Note that as the point granting effect notified in S8, information for specifying the total number of notification points (for example, a message such as “total number of acquired points 5!”) May be notified.

  The notification point total number information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and is added and updated for each point every time it is notified in S8 that a point has been given. The notification point total number information is reset after the first AT lottery is established after the first AT lottery conditions shown in FIGS. 19 to 21 are satisfied.

  In S10, the total granted point information for specifying the total number of granted points, which is the total number of points actually given by the process of S2, is updated. The granted point total number information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and is added and updated for the given points after the given points are set in S2 and a notification lottery is performed.

  The granted point total number information in the present embodiment is reset after the first AT lottery is established after the first AT lottery conditions shown in FIGS. Note that the total number of granted points is not limited to information reset when the first AT lottery is performed, and a predetermined number of points (for example, 2 points) out of the total number of granted points even after the first AT lottery is performed. May be carried over, or may be carried over when the AT is not won in the first AT lottery.

  In the present embodiment, as the upper limit of the total number of granted points, “10” is set in advance except during the bonus, and “5” is set in advance during the bonus. For this reason, when the granted points set in S2 are added to the total number of granted points until the current point grant condition is satisfied, the upper limit is set as the total number of granted points when the above-described upper limit is exceeded. Accordingly, as the upper limit of the total number of notification points, “10” is set in advance except for the bonus, and “5” is set in advance during the bonus. For this reason, in S8, when the point determined by the notification lottery or the like is notified, it is notified from the relationship with the total number of notification points that if the above-described upper limit value is exceeded, the point that becomes the upper limit value is given. The

  When the total number of notification points is already the upper limit value, notification is not performed in the same manner as when no points are given. Therefore, after the granted points are set in S1, if the total number of notification points is already the upper limit value, the point-related process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to S3 only when the total number of notification points is less than the upper limit value. You may comprise.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the point granting condition is established, whether or not to notify is determined according to the difference number or the total number of points actually assigned, It is determined and notified according to the determination result. In addition, the notification point is determined from the point that is less advantageous for the player in the first AT lottery than the actual granted point. For this reason, the points recognized by the player from the notification points are equal to or less than the total number of points actually given. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the total number of points actually granted may be greater than the total number of points specified from the notification points, and the total number of points specified from the notification points. Rather than being controlled by the AT.

  Next, the second AT lottery will be described. The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs the second AT lottery by executing the second AT lottery process included in the AT control process. In the second AT lottery process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied based on a command from the main control unit 41, and the second AT lottery is executed when the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining lottery conditions that trigger the execution of the second AT lottery. FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining a table referred to in the second AT lottery.

  As shown in the normal game state column of FIG. 27, when the current game state is the normal game state, the lottery condition is established by winning the bonus regardless of whether the effect state is AT. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. For example, the sub control unit 91 specifies the current gaming state based on the gaming state command from the main control unit 41 and specifies that the bonus has been won based on the internal winning command from the main control unit 41.

  When the table shown in FIG. 28A is referenced, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 50%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 40%, and the number of navigation stocks is a rate of 10%. Is determined to be 3, 3% of Navistock is determined to be 7%, Navistock is determined to be 10% of 2%, and Navistock is determined to be 20% of 1% The second AT lottery is performed.

  After the bonus is over, not only the number of navigation stocks determined in the 2nd AT lottery, but also the number of navigation stocks determined in the 1st AT lottery based on the bonus winning and the navigation stock determined in the 1st AT lottery after the bonus ends. The AT is controlled according to the total number with the number. The total number of navigation stocks may be configured such that an upper limit number (for example, 20) is provided and the upper limit number is set when the total number is equal to or greater than the upper limit number.

  As shown in the preparation mode and AT column of FIG. 27, in the AT preparation mode, a lottery condition is established by winning a bonus. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG.

  When the table shown in FIG. 28B is referenced, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 35%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 20%. The second AT lottery is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 10 at a rate of 10%, and the navigation stock number is determined to be 20 at a rate of 5%. When the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. 28 (b), the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more, and therefore the AT is always controlled.

  In addition, as shown in the column of the preparation mode and non-AT in FIG. 27, in the non-AT preparation mode, the lottery condition is satisfied every time 5 games are consumed or 30 bonuses are won. . When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table corresponding to the established lottery condition among the tables shown in FIG.

  In the second AT lottery process, in order to specify the number of games that have been consumed after being controlled in the preparation mode, for example, every time a game state command is received from the main control unit 41 after being controlled in the preparation mode, a predetermined counter Is counted up. The sub-control unit 41 specifies the number of games that have been consumed after being controlled in the preparation mode from the value of the counter, and the second AT lottery is executed when the number of games satisfies the lottery condition shown in FIG. For example, when the fifth game is finished after being controlled to the preparation mode, it is determined that five games have been consumed, and the second AT lottery is executed. It should be noted that the value of the predetermined counter is reset by reaching 30, winning a fall replay, winning a bonus, or the like.

  When it is determined that 5 games have been consumed after being controlled in the preparation mode, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 99% with reference to the table at the time of 5G digestion shown in FIG. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at the rate of.

  Further, when it is determined that 10 games have been digested after 5 games have been digested and controlled to the preparation mode, Navistock is referenced at a rate of 98% with reference to the 10G digest table shown in FIG. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number is determined to be 0 and the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at a rate of 2%.

  Further, when it is determined that 15 games have been digested after 5 games have been digested and controlled to the preparation mode, the navigation stock is referenced at a rate of 95% with reference to the table at the time of 15G digestion shown in FIG. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number is determined to be 0 and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 5%.

  Further, when it is determined that 20 games have been consumed after 5 games have been digested and the preparation mode has been controlled, the navigation stock is referenced at a rate of 90% with reference to the table for 20G digestion shown in FIG. The number is determined to be 0, the number of Navistock is determined to be 1 at a rate of 7%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 3 at a rate of 2%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 5 at a rate of 1% In addition, the second AT lottery is performed.

  Further, when it is determined that a total of 25 games have been digested after 5 games have been digested and the preparation mode has been controlled, the navigation stock is referenced at a rate of 70% with reference to the 25G digest table shown in FIG. The number is determined to be 0, the number of Navistock is determined to be 1 at a rate of 20%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 3 at a rate of 5%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 5 at a rate of 3%. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at the rate of%.

  Further, when it is determined that a total of 30 games have been digested after 5 games have been digested and controlled to the preparation mode, the navigation stock is referenced at a rate of 60% with reference to the table for 30G digestion shown in FIG. The number is determined to be 1, the number of Navistock is determined to be 3 at a rate of 25%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 5 at a rate of 10%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 10 at a rate of 3%. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at the rate of%. When the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table at the time of 30G digestion shown in FIG. 28 (d), the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more. Become.

  Further, when a bonus is won in the non-AT preparation mode, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30% with reference to the bonus winning table shown in FIG. The number is determined to be 3, the number of Navistock is determined to be 5 at a rate of 20%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 10 at a rate of 10%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 20 at a rate of 5% In addition, the second AT lottery is performed. When the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the bonus winning table shown in FIG. 28 (d), the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more. Become.

  In addition, as shown in the RT and AT fields in FIG. 27, in the case of ART, a lottery condition is established by winning a bonus. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG.

  When the table shown in FIG. 28 (c) is referred, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 60%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 25%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 10%. The second AT lottery is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 10 at a rate of 3%, and the navigation stock number is determined to be 20 at a rate of 2%.

  When the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. 28 (c), the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more, so that the AT is always controlled.

  In addition, as shown in the RT and non-AT column of FIG. 27, in the case of non-ART, as in the non-AT preparation mode, every time 5 games are consumed or bonus winning is performed until 30 games are consumed. As a result, the lottery condition is established, and the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table corresponding to the established lottery condition among the tables shown in FIG. In addition, in the table shown in FIG. 28 (d), when the 2G AT lottery is performed during the non-ART with reference to the 30G digest table and the bonus winning table, the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more. Therefore, it is always controlled by the AT.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery condition that is satisfied every time 5 games are digested until 30 games are digested in non-ART, considers the number of games digested in the previous non-AT preparation mode controlled by the non-ART. And judge. That is, whether or not 30 games have been digested and whether or not 5 games have been digested in the 30 games, the total number of games of the number of games digested in the non-AT preparation mode and the number of games digested in the non-ART To be determined. That is, the sub-control unit 91 continuously executes a process of counting up a predetermined counter every time a gaming state command is received after being controlled in the non-AT preparation mode even after being controlled to be non-ART. For this reason, when control to the non-AT preparation mode is started, 30 games are consumed after the control to the non-AT preparation mode is started, regardless of whether or not the special event is stopped and controlled to RT. During this time, the players can be concentrated in the second AT lottery, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that the lottery condition that is satisfied every time five games are digested until 30 games are digested in non-ART, is determined based on the number of games digested in non-ART without taking into account the number of games digested in the preparation mode. May be. In this case, when it is fortunately controlled from the non-AT preparation mode to the non-ART, the player can be concentrated again in the second AT lottery in the subsequent 30 games, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, the degree of advantage for the player in the second AT lottery executed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the preparation mode, and the RT is compared. The degree of advantage for the player is, for example, the ratio at which the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more in the AT lottery, that is, the ratio controlled by the AT, and the level at which the number of navigation stocks is determined in the AT lottery And so on.

  First, when the lottery condition is satisfied by winning the bonus, in the second AT lottery executed in the normal gaming state, the table shown in FIG. In the second AT lottery to be executed, the tables shown in FIGS. 28B and 28C or the table shown at the time of winning the bonus in FIG. 28D are referred to. For this reason, in the preparation mode or RT, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be higher at a higher rate. That is, in the preparation mode or RT, it is advantageous for the player by being controlled by the AT at a higher rate and at a higher rate of navigation stock than at the normal gaming state. It can be said that an AT lottery is held. As a result, when the player is in the preparation mode or RT, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled by the AT and acquiring a larger number of navigation stocks than in the normal gaming state. Can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the table for 5G-30G digestion shown in FIG. 28 (d) is referred to every time 5 games are digested until 30 games are exhausted without winning a bonus. And the second AT lottery. For this reason, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the AT is controlled at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. In the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, as described above, by winning a bonus, the AT is controlled at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state, and the navigation stock is increased at a higher rate. By being determined, it can be said that AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player. As a result, in the non-AT preparation mode or the non-ART, a sense of expectation can be given to being controlled by the AT, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, as shown in the table at the time of digestion of 5G to 30G in FIG. The winning rate is set so that each ratio determined by the number is high.

  FIG. 29 shows that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more in the non-AT preparation mode or the second AT lottery in non-ART based on the winning rate of the table at the time of digesting 5G to 30G in FIG. It is a figure which shows the promotion rate promoted to ART. In FIG. 29, the horizontal axis indicates the progress of the number of games, and the vertical axis indicates the promotion rate according to the number of games.

  From FIG. 29, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the promotion rate increases as the number of games played increases. In particular, when 30 games are consumed, the game is always controlled by the AT. As a result, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the player can have a sense of expectation that the preparation mode or RT will be maintained and the game will be played as many times as possible without winning the fall replay. Can be improved.

  In the second AT lottery executed by winning a bonus in the AT preparation mode or ART, the table shown in FIG. 28B is referred to in the AT preparation mode, and FIG. ) Is referred to. For this reason, in either the AT preparation mode or ART, the bonus preparation will always control the AT preparation mode after the bonus ends. However, in the AT preparation mode, the rate is higher at a higher rate than in the ART. A large number of navigation stocks will be determined. That is, in the AT preparation mode, it can be said that the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by determining the number of navigation stocks at a higher rate than in the ART. As a result, when controlled by the AT, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for winning a bonus in the preparation mode, that is, winning a bonus at an early stage as much as possible, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the lottery conditions determined in accordance with the current game state and performance state are satisfied by the second AT lottery process performed by the sub-control unit 91. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the corresponding table shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, even when the above-described notification promotion condition is satisfied, the corresponding number of navigation stocks is added to the number of navigation stocks determined by the AT lottery. That is, the sub-control unit 91 stores, in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, an AT flag indicating the total number obtained by adding and adding the corresponding number of navigation stocks to the number of navigation stocks determined by the AT lottery when the notification promotion condition is satisfied. . FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining the number of navigation stocks added when the notification promoting condition is satisfied.

  When the notification promotion condition is established by winning the strawberry (1) shown in FIG. 17 (e) in the bonus, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 50%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 50%. 2 is determined.

  Further, when the notification promoting condition is established by winning strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) shown in FIG. 17E during the bonus, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, when the notification promoting condition is satisfied, the control is always performed by the AT regardless of the result of the AT lottery. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation that the notification promotion condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the number of navigation stocks determined when winning strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) is determined to be larger than the number of winning strawberry (1) alone. That is, it can be said that AT is controlled so that the player who wins strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) is more advantageous to the player than the player who wins strawberry (1) alone. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the notification promotion condition is established by winning strawberry (1) + strawberry (2), and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment performs the AT management process included in the AT control process when in the preparation mode or RT, so as to respond to the result of the AT lottery and the success or failure of the notification promotion condition. The control to the AT is managed based on the AT flag that is set.

  Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the AT flag is AT when the control to the preparation mode is started after the bonus ends or when the control is already in the non-AT preparation mode. If so, control is made to the AT preparation mode.

  As a result, when the AT is determined to be controlled according to the result of the AT lottery by the bonus winning or bonus end or the establishment of the notification promotion condition, the AT preparation mode is controlled after the bonus ends, and the AT is not determined to be controlled. If this happens, the non-AT preparation mode is controlled after the bonus. In addition, when it is determined that the AT is controlled in the second AT lottery based on the number of games in the non-AT preparation mode, the AT preparation mode is subsequently controlled. In the preparation mode, the navigation preparation can be executed by controlling to the AT preparation mode without consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the AT is AT from the AT flag when the special event stops in the preparation mode and the control to the RT is started, or when it is already controlled to the non-ART. When the number of navigation stocks is reached, 1 point is consumed (subtracted) to control ART during a predetermined number of times (for example, 50).

  In RT, by consuming one point of the number of navigation stocks, it is controlled to ART that can execute navigation effects while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times. When 1 point is consumed for the number of navigation stocks, the AT flag indicating the number of navigation stocks subtracted by 1 is updated.

  As a result, when the control to the RT is started, when the control to the AT is determined, the navigation stock is consumed by 1 point and the game is controlled to the ART while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times. When no is performed, it is controlled to non-ART. In this case, in this embodiment, the control is performed to the ART when the control to the RT is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control is performed to the ART when the navigation target combination (for example, the fall replay) is won. May be.

  Also, when it is determined to control to AT in the second AT lottery by non-ART game number digestion, the navigation stock number is consumed by one point and the game is controlled to ART while digesting the game a predetermined number of times. In this case, in this embodiment, the control is performed by ART when winning the navigation target combination (for example, fall replay). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control may be performed when it is determined to be controlled by AT. Good.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs AT management processing to count the number of games that have been digested when it is an ART, and control it to a non-ART when a predetermined number of times is reached. At this time, if the number of navigation stocks indicated by the AT flag is 0, it is updated to the AT flag indicating that it is not AT.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs AT management processing to determine whether or not the fall replay has been won when it is non-ART. When it is determined that the fall replay has been won, and when it is further determined from the AT flag that the vehicle is an AT, the navigation stock number is consumed by 1 point, and the ART is controlled again while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times. . On the other hand, when the fall replay is won and the AT flag specifies that it is not AT, the ART is not controlled and the navigation effect is not executed.

  As described above, when it is RT, it is controlled to ART while a predetermined number of games are consumed by consuming one point of the number of navigation stock. Also, even when the game is digested a predetermined number of times in ART and is once controlled to be non-ART, the fall replay is performed on condition that the AT flag is still specified and the number of navigation stocks is 1 or more. It is controlled again by ART while a predetermined number of games have been consumed since winning. Thereby, it can be said that the ART can be controlled over a period corresponding to the number of navigation stocks set according to the result of the AT lottery and the result of success or failure of the notification promotion condition. Further, it can be said that the ART can be repeatedly controlled by the number of times corresponding to the number of navigation stocks set according to the result of the AT lottery and the result of success or failure of the notification promotion condition.

  In addition, the sub control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs the navigation effect according to the result of the internal winning by performing the navigation effect execution process included in the game effect execution process in the AT preparation mode or ART. Is done. The result of the internal winning is specified from the internal winning command from the main control unit 41.

  For example, in the AT preparation mode, when a fall replay is won, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay won simultaneously with the fall replay is executed. Also, in ART, when a fall replay is won, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that is won at the same time as the fall replay is executed, and one of nine roles (1) to (9) is won. A navigation effect corresponding to the type of nine winning combinations is sometimes executed.

  As a navigation effect, when replay + falling replay is won, an effect of displaying a message such as “Press from the left or inside!” For displaying information for first stopping the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C is executed. When + falling replay + BAR replay is won, an effect of displaying a message such as “Press from the right!” Is executed.

  In addition, when winning any of the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9), information that can identify the type of the winning 9 winning combination, for example, when winning 9 winning combinations (1), The effect of displaying a message such as “7, aim at the right red 7!” Is executed, and when winning 9 roles (9), the effect of displaying a message such as “Aim at the left BAR and the right BAR!” Executed.

  Both the navigation effect relating to the fall replay and the navigation effect relating to the nine-piece roles (1) to (9) are executed in a common notification mode by displaying a message for specifying the operation procedure on the liquid crystal display 51. For this reason, it is not necessary to specify whether the information notified by the navigation effect is information for avoiding the fall replay or information for winning the 9-piece combination (1) to (9), and is common. By stopping according to the information notified in the notification mode, it is possible to avoid the fall replay winning and to win the 9 winning winning combinations.

  The navigation effects are not limited to those executed in the above-described manner, and may be executed in any manner as long as the effects are executed in a manner corresponding to the internal winning result.

  As described above, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment performs the AT control process based on the command from the main control unit 41, thereby controlling the effect state according to the result of the AT lottery and the success or failure of the notification promotion condition. When it is AT, a navigation effect is executed.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment is a non-ART or a period from the non-ART to the normal gaming state until the predetermined number of games are consumed (executes a non-ART effect described later in FIG. 33). 9 period combination (1) to (9) by winning the non-AT navigation effect execution process during the non-AT period, etc. A non-AT navigation lottery for determining whether or not to perform a navigation effect corresponding to the type of the game is performed, and a navigation effect corresponding to the type of the nine winning combinations selected when winning the non-AT navigation lottery is executed. The

  FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining a table used for non-AT navigation lottery. When it is a non-ART or when it is a period from the non-ART to the normal game state until the predetermined number of games are consumed, if any of the nine-player roles (1) to (9) is won, When the AT navigation lottery is executed, it is determined that the navigation effect corresponding to the type of nine winning combinations selected at 90% is executed, and it is determined that the navigation effect is not executed at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, when one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won in the period when the player is non-ART or is controlled from the non-ART to the normal game state and the predetermined number of games are consumed, a predetermined rate is taken. A navigation effect is performed. Thereby, in the period of non-ART or in a period in which a predetermined number of games are consumed while being controlled from the non-ART to the normal gaming state, it is possible to reduce the missing of nine winning combinations. The predetermined ratio is not limited to the above winning rate. For example, when it is non-ART, or when a predetermined number of games are consumed by being controlled from non-ART to the normal game state, when winning one of the nine roles (1) to (9), the rate is 100%. A navigation effect may be executed.

  Next, an example of a case where the AT is not controlled and a case where the AT is controlled according to the result of the AT lottery and the result of success or failure of the notification promotion condition will be described. FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining an example of the case where the AT is not controlled and the case where the AT is controlled according to the result of the AT lottery and the result of success or failure of the notification promotion condition. In FIG. 32, the lower columns of the preparation mode and RT indicate whether or not the AT is being performed, and the navigation target combination in each of the preparation mode and RT. In addition, the x mark for the navigation target role indicates that the navigation effect is not executed even when the navigation target role is won, and the ○ mark for the navigation target role indicates the navigation effect when the navigation target role is selected. The symbol “Δ” for the navigation target combination indicates that the navigation effect is executed according to a predetermined probability when the navigation target combination is won.

  FIG. 32 (a) shows that AT is not won in the AT lottery, AT is not won in the second AT lottery in the non-AT preparation mode after the bonus ends, and the special rollout is stopped before the replay. It is a figure which shows the example which was won and was controlled to the normal game state.

  In FIG. 32 (b), AT was not won in the AT lottery and was not won in the second AT lottery in the non-AT preparation mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which the AT is not won in the second AT lottery during the non-ART and as a result, a fall replay is won and the game is controlled in the normal gaming state.

  As described above, in the preparation mode and RT, the winning probability of falling replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state. Also, the fall replay has different winning avoidance procedures depending on the type of replay that is won at the same time. For this reason, if the production state is not controlled by the AT in the preparation mode and RT, it is impossible to grasp whether or not the fall replay has been won, and intentionally avoiding the fall replay winning with a high probability. I can't. As a result, if the performance state is not controlled by the AT, as shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B, the RT is not easily controlled from the preparation mode to the RT and even if it is luckily controlled by the RT. However, it becomes difficult to maintain the normal gaming state, making it difficult for the player to obtain profits.

  On the other hand, when it is fortunately controlled from the non-AT preparation mode to RT as shown in FIG. 32 (b), as shown in FIG. 31, the navigation effect is executed according to a predetermined probability at the time of winning nine tickets. The benefit of being played is given to the player.

  FIG. 32C is a diagram showing an example in which AT is won by the second AT lottery during the non-ART shown in FIG. 32B and promoted to ART. When it is determined that the game is an AT in RT, the control of making ART during a predetermined number of game digests is repeatedly performed according to the number of navigation stocks. In ART, when it is determined that the fall replay is won based on the internal winning command from the main control unit 41, it is determined that one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won. Sometimes a corresponding navigation effect is executed.

  In addition, when the AT is won in the second AT lottery during the non-AT preparation mode, the player is promoted to the AT preparation mode. In the AT preparation mode, when it is determined that the fall replay is won based on the internal winning command from the main control unit 41, a corresponding navigation effect is executed.

  Thus, even in a disadvantageous situation where the production state is not controlled by the AT in the preparation mode and RT, there is a possibility that it can be controlled by the AT even during non-AT by winning the AT in the second AT lottery. . Therefore, even in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, a sense of expectation for promotion to the AT preparation mode or ART can be given, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (c), even if navigation at the time of winning the fall replay is executed in ART, if the stop operation is mistaken, the fall replay will be won and the gaming state will be the normal game. At the same time, the AT is terminated. As described above, when the AT flag is specified to be AT, when winning the fall replay, the number of navigation stocks is cleared, and the AT flag is updated to a flag specifying that the AT is not AT. As a result, if the AT is accidentally ended despite the situation where the navigation effect is performed, the AT is not controlled unless the AT lottery is won again or the notification promotion condition is not satisfied. can do.

  As described above, when a bonus is won during an AT, and the number of navigation stocks according to the result of the AT lottery performed due to the bonus winning is added and added, the fact that the AT flag is an AT is indicated. If you win a fall replay when you are identified, you are not limited to clearing the number of Navistock, Navistock that performs the clear number determination process to determine the number of Navistock to clear and subtracts the determined Navistock number The number is updated to an AT flag indicating that the number can be specified and it is not AT, and then the number of navigation stocks according to the result of AT lottery performed by bonus winning is added and added, and control is performed to the AT after the bonus ends. May be. As a result, even if the AT is closed due to accidental fall replay winning while it is in AT, there is a possibility that the number of Navistock will be added by winning the bonus. It can be compensated afterwards.

  FIG. 32 (d) illustrates an example in which the AT preparation mode and ART are controlled after the bonus ends when the AT promotion or the notification promoting condition is established during the bonus in the AT lottery executed by the bonus winning or the bonus end. It is a figure for doing.

  In the AT preparation mode, when it is determined that the fall replay is won, a corresponding navigation effect is executed. For this reason, as described above, unless the operation procedure is wrong, it is possible to reliably avoid the fall replay winning and stop the special outcome and control the ART.

  When it is determined that the game is an AT in RT, the control of making ART during a predetermined number of game digests is repeatedly performed according to the number of navigation stocks. In ART, not only when it is determined that a fall replay has been won, but also when it is determined that a winning 9-piece combination has been won, a corresponding navigation effect is executed. For this reason, as described above, unless the operation procedure is mistaken, it is possible to reliably avoid the fall replay winning and continue the RT, and to reliably acquire medals to be paid out by winning nine winning prizes.

  Thus, if the performance state is controlled to AT, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), it is easy to control from the preparation mode to RT and hardly control to the normal gaming state, and is controlled to RT. Also, the RT can be easily maintained, and the player can easily obtain profits.

  As described above, after being controlled to ART for the number of times corresponding to the number of navigation stocks, it is controlled to be non-ART, and thereafter, no navigation effect is executed even when a fall replay is won. On the other hand, even after being controlled to be non-ART, when a winning combination of 9 sheets is won, a navigation effect corresponding to the winning combination of 9 sheets is executed with a predetermined probability as shown in FIG.

  Next, the game state effect executed according to the current game state and effect state will be described. The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs a game state effect execution process included in the game effect execution process, thereby providing a game state effect related to the current game state and the effect state on the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect. This is performed using electrical components such as the LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55.

  As the gaming state effect, for example, when in the AT preparation mode, an AT preparation mode effect capable of specifying the AT preparation mode (for example, a message such as “AT preparation mode is in progress!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51). In the case of ART, an ART effect (for example, a message such as “ART in progress!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51) that can identify the ART is performed, and the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART is performed. In some cases, a non-AT effect (for example, a flashing display of the effect effect LED 52) that can specify non-AT is performed. In addition, during the bonus, a predetermined bonus effect that can identify the bonus is performed, and during the normal gaming state, a predetermined normal gaming state effect that can identify the normal gaming state is performed.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining a game state effect executed in accordance with the current game state and effect state. FIG. 33 (a) shows an example when there is a number of navigation stocks (for example, 3 points) by winning an AT in the AT lottery, etc., and FIG. FIG. 33 (c) shows an example in which the normal gaming state is controlled without being controlled, and FIG. 33 (c) shows a case in which there is no navigation stock number and the normal gaming state is controlled after being controlled from the preparation mode to RT. An example is shown. In FIGS. 33A to 33C, the current gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41 is shown in the upper stage, and the current performance state controlled by the sub-control unit 91 is shown in the middle stage. In the lower part, a game state effect controlled by the sub-control unit 91 is shown.

  First, referring to FIG. 33A, when the gaming state is a bonus as shown in (a1), a bonus effect is executed as shown in (a3). Further, when the bonus is ended and the preparation mode is controlled, the production state is controlled to AT as shown in (a2), and the AT preparation mode production is controlled as shown in (a3). Is running. Thereby, it is recognized that the AT preparation mode is controlled, and the player can intentionally avoid the fall replay winning based on the navigation effect, and can surely stop the special outcome and control to ART.

  Further, when the gaming state is controlled to RT as shown in (a1), as described above, it is repeatedly controlled to ART by the number of times corresponding to the number of navigation stocks. That is, as shown in (a2), every time the number of navigation stock is consumed, it is controlled to AT for 50 games by controlling to AT. Thereafter, when it is controlled to be non-ART and the fact that the AT flag is specified from the AT flag when the fall replay is won, the number of navigation stocks is consumed and the process of controlling 50 games to ART again is repeated. In FIG. 33A, since the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3, the ART is controlled 3 times as shown in (a2).

  Further, while the ART is controlled, the navigation effect is executed and the ART effect is executed as shown in (a3). Accordingly, it is recognized that the control is performed by the ART, and the player can make a prize without losing 9 winning combinations while intentionally avoiding the fall replay prize based on the navigation effect.

  On the other hand, as shown in (a3), the non-ART effect is executed while the ART is ended by having consumed 50 games and is controlled to be non-ART. As a result, there is a possibility that the number of navigation stocks may remain even during a non-ART presentation, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled by ART again. , You can improve the fun of the game.

  If the AT flag is not specified as AT when the fall replay is won in a non-ART, the number of times corresponding to the number of navigation stocks is controlled to ART, so the navigation effect is executed without being controlled by the AT. Not.

  In the present embodiment, even if a fall replay is won in non-ART and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state, as shown in (a3), the non-ART effect is continued while the predetermined number of games are consumed. Run. As a result, even when the game state is controlled to the normal game state, the player can have the expectation for being controlled by the ART again as described above, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  After executing the non-ART effect over the predetermined game while in the normal game state, the normal game state effect corresponding to the normal game state is executed as shown in (a3).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, when a non-ART effect is being executed when it is non-ART or is controlled from a non-ART to a normal gaming state and a predetermined number of games are consumed. When one of the winning combinations (1) to (9) is won, a corresponding navigation effect is executed at a predetermined rate. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation to be controlled by ART again, improve the fun of the game, and reduce the missed out of 9 roles and win the prize. It is possible to reduce the loss due to not.

  Next, referring to FIG. 33 (b), when the bonus is ended and the preparation mode is controlled, as shown in (b2), the effect state is not controlled by the AT, so the non-AT preparation mode is controlled, As shown in (b3), the non-AT effect is executed. In addition, referring to FIG. 33 (c), even if it is fortunately controlled to RT in non-AT preparation mode, it is controlled to non-ART because it is not controlled by AT, and non-AT effects continue as shown in (c3). And running.

  By executing the non-AT effect, the player recognizes that the AT is not controlled and the navigation effect is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to digest the game as many times as possible without winning the fall replay, and to give the player a sense of expectation for winning the AT in the second AT lottery based on game digestion.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (b3) and (c3), as in FIG. 33 (a3), even if a fall replay is won in the preparation mode or RT and the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the game continues over the predetermined game. Continue to perform non-AT effects. As a result, even when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, it is possible to digest the game as many times as possible without winning the fall replay, and to have a sense of expectation for winning the AT in the second AT lottery by game digestion. Since it can be held by a person, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, when it is non-ART or when it is controlled from non-ART to the normal gaming state and a predetermined number of games are consumed, that is, after luck is controlled to RT, In the period from the end of RT to the normal game state until a predetermined number of games are consumed, the corresponding navigation effect is executed at a predetermined rate when one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won. The As a result, it is possible to reduce a loss caused by not winning a prize even though the winning combination has been reduced by reducing the missed 9-piece combination.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1-1) In the above-described embodiment, when a fall replay is won in the preparation mode or RT, the game state is controlled to the normal gaming state. As described with reference to FIG. 18 (a), this fall replay is based on whether the replay + fall replay is won or whether replay + fall replay + BAR replay is won, and an operation procedure for winning and avoiding a win. Each operating procedure is different. In addition, for the nine-piece roles (1) to (9), even if one of them is elected, the stop switches 8L and 8R are connected to these roles from the symbols constituting each of the nine-sheet roles (1) to (9). If you don't operate at the right time to win, you won't win the 9 winning prizes.

  On the other hand, when controlled by the AT, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that is won simultaneously with the fall replay is executed. For this reason, when controlled by the AT, even when the fall replay is won, it can be operated according to the navigation procedure according to the operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning.

  Further, when controlled by the AT, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of the winning 9-sheet combination is executed when any of the 9-port combinations (1) to (9) is won. For this reason, when controlled by the AT, even when one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won, an operation for winning the winning nine winning combination according to the navigation effect Can be operated in steps.

  Therefore, when being controlled by the AT, it is possible to avoid being controlled to the normal gaming state, and it is possible to reduce the missed winning combination of nine sheets, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  Such ATs are controlled by being determined as one or more navigation stocks in AT lotteries such as the first AT lottery shown in FIGS. 19 to 21 and the second AT lottery shown in FIGS. 27 and 28. The

  In addition, the first AT lottery among the AT lotteries is performed at the time of winning the bonus and at the end of the bonus as shown in FIG. In the 1st AT lottery conducted at the time of winning the bonus, it is determined that the larger the total number of granted points, the higher the number of granted points, the greater the number of Navistocks will be set to 1 or more, according to the total number of granted points. The lottery will be drawn according to the winning rate. In addition, in the first AT lottery performed at the end of the bonus, according to the total number of granted points given during the bonus, the larger the total number of granted points, the higher the number of navigation stocks is set to 1 or more. The lottery will be drawn according to the winning rate specified in. Therefore, the player is given more points so that the first AT lottery is performed according to the winning rate determined to be determined to be a higher number of navigation stocks of 1 or more at a higher rate. It can make you expect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the point related processing shown in FIG. 22, the point granting effect for notifying that the point has been granted in S8 is provided on the condition that the point granting condition is established and the point is given. An informing process is performed. In this notification process, based on the processing results of S3 to S6 in FIG. 22, the point giving effect that accurately notifies the grant points set in S2 in FIG. 22 or the grant points set in S2 in FIG. A point giving effect for informing a small number of points is executed. Further, in the point related processing shown in FIG. 22, even when the point granting condition is established and the point is given, when it is decided not to be notified in the notice lottery in S4 or S6 in FIG. Is not executed, and no notification is given that points have been awarded. For this reason, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that more points than the total number of points specified from the executed point giving effect may be actually given.

  As a result, the first AT lottery is performed according to the winning rate determined to be determined to be 1 or more and a larger number of navigation stock at a higher rate, and the point granting effect is controlled by the AT. It is possible to have a greater sense of expectation than the total number of points specified from. In addition, even when the total number of points specified from the point granting effect is relatively small, more points than the total number of points may actually be given, so a higher ratio of 1 or more and more It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the first AT lottery will be performed according to the winning rate determined so as to be determined by a large number of navigation stocks and that the AT will be controlled.

  Further, in the point related processing shown in FIG. 22, a point granting effect is performed for the grant point set in S2 of FIG. 22 on the condition that the point granting condition is satisfied and the point is granted. For this reason, the above-mentioned feeling of expectation can be raised step by step every time the point giving effect is executed. In addition, in order for the player to predict the total number of points given, it is possible to add an interest that the player himself accumulates and stores the points specified from the executed point giving effects.

  (1-2) In the difference number corresponding notification lottery in S4 of the point related processing, the tables shown in FIGS. 25A and 25B are referred to, and whether or not to notify and whether or not to give the given point accurately will be described. Is determined with a probability corresponding to the difference between the total number of notification points specified from the already performed point granting effects and the total number of granted points actually given. Further, in the difference number notification lottery, when the difference number is larger than when the difference number is small, it is determined to notify at a higher rate, and at a higher rate, points awarded or points closer to the given point are given. A notification point is determined so as to notify the user of the fact. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large and the reliability of the point specified from the point giving effect from becoming too low.

  (1-3) In the total lot notification lottery in S6 of the point related processing, the tables shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B are referred to, and whether or not to notify and whether or not to give the given point accurately are determined. It is determined with a probability corresponding to the total number of granted points actually given. Furthermore, in the total number corresponding notification lottery, when the total number of granted points is smaller than when the total number of granted points is large, it is decided to report at a high rate, and at a high rate, the points that are closer to the granted point or the given points The notification point is determined so that the fact that it has been granted is notified. On the other hand, the smaller the total number of granted points, the higher the player's attention to whether or not the points have been notified. Therefore, at a stage where the player's attention level with respect to the point giving effect is high, the player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of security corresponding to the given points at a high rate.

  (1-4) As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, when one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won during RT, a predetermined value is obtained regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. The non-AT navigation lottery is performed in accordance with the ratio, and when it is determined that the navigation effect is to be executed, the navigation effect corresponding to the type of the winning nine-piece combination is performed. For this reason, when it is controlled by RT, it is possible to reduce the missed winning combination of nine sheets regardless of whether or not it is controlled by AT. As a result, the player was not able to control the AT because only a small number of points were given, or because it was controlled by the AT but ended in a short period because the number of navigation stocks decided was small. It is possible to reduce the discomfort that is held, and to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the interest of the game is extremely lowered when not controlled by the AT.

  (1-5) As shown in FIG. 30, when the notification promotion condition is satisfied, the number of navigation stocks is set so as to be more advantageous for the player than when the notification promotion condition is not satisfied. For this reason, even when only a small number of points are awarded, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled by the AT by establishing the notification promotion condition, and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

  Further, the number of stocks set when the notification promotion condition is satisfied is added to the number of stocks set in the AT lottery. For this reason, the player can easily experience the advantage over the establishment of the notification promoting condition, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (2) As shown in FIG. 25 (a) and FIG. 26 (a), even when the point granting condition is satisfied, when it is determined not to be notified by the notice lottery, the point giving effect is not executed. For this reason, even when the point giving effect is not executed, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that points are actually given, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, when a melon is won, the point granting condition is satisfied when the player wins a predetermined lottery. Even when the point granting condition is satisfied and points are awarded, when it is determined not to be notified by the notice lottery, the point giving effect is not executed. On the other hand, when a melon is won, a winning occurs regardless of the operation procedure. For this reason, even if the point granting effect is not executed when winning the melon and the impression is as if it was not won in the predetermined lottery, it is actually won in the predetermined lottery and points are given The player can have a sense of expectation for the game, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 25 (b) and FIG. 26 (b), even when it is determined to be notified by the notification lottery, the fact that fewer points than the actually granted points are granted A point giving effect for informing the user can be executed. For this reason, even when only a small number of points are identified from the point granting effect, the player can have a sense of expectation that more points are actually given, improving the interest of the game Can be made.

  (4) As shown in FIG. 23, the point granting condition can be established in a high probability state that is continued until the probability state is exhausted to 30 or 50 games, or in a bonus that is controlled over a plurality of games. For this reason, the expectation with respect to being controlled to a high probability state can be given. In addition, it is possible to have a greater expectation for being controlled by the bonus. Furthermore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a state that continues for a plurality of games such as a high probability state and a bonus.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 18 (a), the fall replay that is triggered by winning in the preparation mode or RT and controlling to the normal gaming state depends on the type of reel to be stopped first. Since the case of winning the falling replay and the case of avoiding the falling replay winning are distributed, it is possible to improve the fun when the reels are stopped.

  Further, since it is not necessary to consider the stop operation timing when avoiding the fall replay winning in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the player's burden caused when the reels are stopped.

  (6) In the bonus, the combination that triggers the point granting condition is a melon or nine winning combinations as shown in FIG. 23 (b), whereas the combination that triggers the notification promotion condition is as shown in FIG. And strawberry (1) and strawberry (2). In other words, in the bonus, by winning a plurality of winning combinations such as melon, nine winning combinations, strawberry (1), and strawberry (2), the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more and higher at a higher rate. Can give a sense of expectation to the game and improve the fun of the game.

  (7) When the strawberry (1) or strawberry (2), which is the trigger for establishing the notification promotion condition, is selected, special reel control is performed for the middle reel 2C as shown in FIG. 18 (b). For this reason, the notification promoting condition is satisfied when a bonus that can be stopped only when special reel control is performed (symbol stop of symbol number 4 or 5 in the middle stage of the middle reel 2C) is achieved. The player can recognize that he / she has done. Therefore, during the bonus, it is possible to concentrate the player on the stopped appearance, and to add the fun of specifying success or failure of the notification promotion condition from the outcome.

  Further, when the probability state is a high probability state other than during the bonus and when strawberry (1) or strawberry (2) is won, the point granting condition is satisfied as shown in FIG. . Therefore, even when the player is in a high-probability state, the player can be concentrated at the point where he / she is stopped, and the point-scoring condition is established not only from the point-sparing effect but also from the point. The player can recognize that it has been granted.

  (8) As shown in FIG. 30, in the bonus, the strawberry (2) is won more than when the strawberry (1) is won alone and the notification promotion condition is satisfied without winning the strawberry (2). When the notification promoting condition is satisfied, a larger number of navigation stocks is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 18 (b), on the condition that the strawberry (2) is won, the special reel control for stopping the symbol of symbol number 4 in the middle stage of the middle reel 2C can be executed. Therefore, in the bonus, the symbol number 4 is stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 2C, so that the strawberry (2), which is more advantageous to the player than when the strawberry (1) is selected alone, is won and the notification promotion condition is established. The player can recognize that the game has been performed, and more fun can be added.

  (9-1) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 16A and the like, control is made to the preparation mode after the bonus ends, and in the preparation mode, nine combinations (1) to (9 ) When a special event that can be derived only when the 9-card combination is missed is stopped when one of the above is won, control to RT which is advantageous to the player, and a fall replay is performed in the preparation mode. When winning, it is controlled to the normal gaming state. For this reason, RT can be controlled when the special outcome is stopped before the fall replay wins in the preparation mode after the bonus ends.

  As described with reference to FIG. 18A, the fall replay that triggers the transition to the normal gaming state and the transition to the RT is won by either replay + fall replay or replay + fall replay + BAR replay. The reel control is performed so that the operation procedure for winning and the operation procedure for avoiding the winning are different.

  Further, when the AT is controlled in the preparation mode, that is, in the AT preparation mode, as described with reference to FIG. 32 and the like, a navigation effect according to the type of replay that is simultaneously won during the fall replay win is executed.

  As described above, after the bonus is over, the game state in the previous stage of RT is controlled to the preparation mode, and is controlled to RT only when the special event is stopped before winning the fall replay in the preparation mode. In this preparation mode, when controlled by the AT, that is, in the AT preparation mode, even when a fall replay is won, an operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning is performed according to the navigation effect. Can do. On the other hand, when the AT is not controlled in the preparation mode, that is, in the non-AT preparation mode, the falling replay winning cannot be intentionally avoided, and the winning rate of the falling replay is higher than the appearance rate of the special roll. Therefore, there is an increased possibility that the player will win the fall replay before the special game is stopped and be controlled in the normal gaming state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, the number of determination values is set so that the winning rate of the falling replay is higher in the preparation mode than in the RT, and the falling replay winning is set. Thus, there is a higher possibility that the player is controlled to the normal gaming state without being controlled by RT. As a result, it is possible to give the player a clear degree of advantage for the player depending on whether or not the AT is controlled in the preparation mode, which is the previous stage of RT, and the expectation for being controlled in the AT preparation mode is effectively increased. Can increase the interest of the game.

  Similarly, in the RT, when the AT is controlled by the AT in the RT, that is, in the ART, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that is simultaneously won at the fall replay win is executed. For this reason, in ART, even when the fall replay is won, it is possible to operate according to the navigation procedure according to the operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning. On the other hand, when the AT is not controlled by the RT, that is, in the non-ART, the fall replay winning cannot be intentionally avoided, and when the fall replay is won, the fall replay is won and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state. The possibility that it will end up increases. As a result, even in RT, it is possible to give a clear degree of advantage to the player depending on whether or not it is controlled by AT, effectively increasing the expectation for being controlled by ART, and improving the interest of the game be able to.

  (9-2) As shown in FIG. 27, the lottery condition for the second AT lottery is established only when the bonus is won in the normal gaming state, whereas it is not controlled by the AT in the preparation mode or RT. This is true not only when the bonus is won but also when the game has been completed a predetermined number of times. Further, in the second AT lottery, the ratio at which the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more and the control is determined to be AT, and the ratio at which the number of navigation stocks is determined to be larger are tables referred to when the normal gaming state (Table in FIG. 28 (a)), which is referred to when the preparation mode is controlled (the table at the time of winning a bonus in FIGS. 28 (b) and (d)), or controlled by AT in RT. The winning rate is set so that the table that is referred to when it is not (the bonus winning table in FIG. 28D) is higher. In other words, when controlled in the preparation mode or in non-ART that is not controlled by AT in RT, AT lottery is performed so as to be more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state. For this reason, even in the preparation mode or non-ART, the player can advance the game while expecting to be controlled by the AT, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (9-3) In the non-AT preparation mode and non-ART, as shown in FIG. 27, the lottery condition is satisfied every time 5 games are consumed until 30 games are consumed, and the second AT lottery is performed. That is, in the non-AT preparation mode and non-ART, the lottery condition is established and the second AT lottery is performed every time the game is consumed a predetermined number of times during non-AT. For this reason, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the player can advance the game while expecting to be controlled by the AT step by step every time the game is consumed a predetermined number of times. Can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in the table at the time of 30G digestion in FIG. 28 (d), in the preparation mode and RT, the game is digested by 30 games without generating a fall replay prize during non-AT, so that the AT is selected in the second AT lottery. It is decided to control, and it is always controlled by AT. For this reason, in the non-AT preparation mode and non-ART, it is possible to add the fun of setting the final goal to digest 30 games without causing a fall replay winning and proceeding with the game, improving the fun of the game Can be made.

  Note that the conditions that must be controlled by the AT depending on the number of non-AT digested games are that the number of games digested during the non-AT reaches a predetermined number of games (30 games), and in the non-AT preparation mode. The number of games that have been digested to reach the predetermined number of games (15 games), the number of games that have been digested during non-ART will reach the predetermined number of games (15 games), The number of games avoiding the winning of the falling replay has reached a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games), and the number of games won for a specific winning combination during non-AT is determined (for example, 3 games) may be established.

  In addition, as shown in the table at the time of digesting 5G to 30G in FIG. 28 (d), the ratio controlled by AT and the ratio determined by a larger number of navigation stocks increase stepwise according to game digestion. The second AT lottery is performed every time the game is consumed a predetermined number of times during non-AT. This makes it possible to vary the sense of expectation for being controlled by the AT in accordance with the number of games digested during the non-AT. That is, it is possible to increase the expectation for being controlled by the AT in proportion to the number of games that have been digested, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (10) The special event that triggers the transition from the preparation mode to the RT in the above-described embodiment is an operation of dropping the nine-piece combination when winning the nine-piece combination as described in FIG. Reel control is performed so that it is stopped on the winning line only when operated according to the procedure. As a result, in the preparation mode, if a player loses a 9-piece winning combination, a medal to be paid out cannot be obtained due to the occurrence of a 9-piece winning combination. Since it is stopped and controlled to RT which is advantageous for the player, the disadvantage can be compensated.

  Even when nine winning combinations are won in the AT preparation mode, the navigation effect is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the stop operation is performed according to the navigation effect and the winning combination of nine pieces can be won, but the RT is not controlled indefinitely.

  On the other hand, when 9 winning combinations are won in ART, a navigation effect is executed. As a result, by performing a stop operation according to the navigation effect, it is possible to obtain medals to be paid out in association with the occurrence of the nine winning combinations. In addition, by setting the outcome that can be stopped when a small role is missed as a trigger for transition from the preparation mode to RT, there is no need to newly set a winning combination that triggers the transition, for example. The design burden in the machine development stage can be reduced.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in the bonus winning table of FIG. 28 (d), in addition to being controlled by the bonus when the bonus is won in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, After the bonus is over, it is controlled to the AT preparation mode, and is controlled to ART unless a stop operation is mistaken based on the navigation effect. For this reason, in the non-AT preparation mode and non-ART, a sense of expectation for winning the bonus can be more strongly held, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the embodiment described above, as shown in the tables of FIGS. 28B and 28C, in addition to being controlled by the bonus when the bonus is won in the AT preparation mode or ART, After the bonus is over, the AT preparation mode is controlled, and ART is controlled unless a stop operation is mistaken based on the navigation effect. For this reason, since it is controlled by AT continuously with a bonus in between, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, when a bonus is won in the preparation mode or RT, regardless of whether the player is an AT or not, it is controlled to the AT preparation mode after the bonus ends, and the stop operation is erroneously performed based on the navigation effect. Although the example controlled by ART has been described as long as there is not, this is not limited to this, and even when a bonus is won in the preparation mode or RT, it is always controlled by the AT after the bonus ends only when it is non-AT, The AT may be configured to be controlled by the AT only when winning with a predetermined probability. In this case, the loss incurred during the non-AT can be compensated afterwards by winning the bonus at the non-AT. Also, even when a bonus is won in the preparation mode or RT, it is always controlled to AT after the bonus ends only when it is AT, and when it is non-AT, it is controlled to AT only when winning with a predetermined probability You may comprise so that it may not be carried out. In this case, it is possible to add a premium to winning a bonus at the AT and improve the interest of the game.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

  (A) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, the example in which the navigation stock is set when the notification promoting condition is satisfied has been described. However, when the notification promoting condition is satisfied, any process that is advantageous for the player regarding the AT control may be executed. For example, when the notification promoting condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of points (for example, 5 points) may be given, and one or more at a higher rate than when the tables shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 are referred to. In addition, the first AT lottery may be performed with reference to a table in which the winning rate is set so that a larger number of navigation stocks is determined. In FIG. 20 and FIG. Points determined (for example, “6” in FIG. 20, or points whose total is “6” or more in relation to the total number of granted points) may be granted. According to such a configuration, even if the total number of points granted when the point granting condition is satisfied is the number of points with a relatively low degree of advantage for the player, the notification promotion condition is satisfied, The player can have a greater sense of expectation than the total number of points actually given for being controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (B) In the above-described embodiment, for the fall replay that triggers the preparation mode or RT, as shown in FIG. 18A, winning is avoided when the stop order is a predetermined stop order. A possible example has been described. In addition, for the 9-piece roles (1) to (9) in which the navigation effect is executed at a predetermined ratio even if it is non-ART, an example can be awarded when the stop operation timing is the predetermined stop operation timing Explained.

  However, the fall replay can avoid winnings on the condition that it is a predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination, as in the case of nine winning combinations (1) to (9). May be.

  For example, as a winning combination in which a navigation effect is executed at a predetermined ratio even if it is non-ART, 9 winning combinations (1) (configuration symbol: “Red 7-ANY-ANY”), 9 winning combinations (2) (configuration) Set the symbol: “White 7-ANY-ANY”), 9-piece role (3) (Composition symbol: “BAR-ANY-ANY”), and fall replay as a winning combination that will trigger the preparation mode and RT (1) (Composition pattern: “white strawberry / black strawberry-ANY-red 7), tumble replay (2) (composition pattern:“ white strawberry / black strawberry—ANY-white 7 ”, tumble replay (3) (composition pattern:“ White strawberry / black strawberry-ANY-BAR) may be set.

  In this case, with respect to the nine winning combinations (1) to (3), the winning is made on condition that an operation for stopping the left reel 2L is performed at a predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination. Can do. For example, when the 9-piece combination (1) is won, the 9-piece combination (1) is placed on the left reel 2L on the condition that “Red 7” is stopped at a timing that allows the drawing to be made on the winning line. You can win a prize.

  In addition, for the fall replays (1) to (3), it is possible to avoid winning a prize on condition that an operation for stopping the right reel 2R is performed at a predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination. it can. For example, when the fall replay (1) is won, the right reel 2R receives the red fall 7 on the condition that “red 7” is stopped at a timing that cannot be drawn into the pay line. Can be avoided.

  As a result, even when the left reel 2L is erroneously stopped when the winning of the fall replay is avoided, the right reel 2R is stopped at a predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination. By performing the operation, it is possible to avoid winning a fall replay. Further, in the case of winning nine winning combinations, even if the right reel 2R is erroneously stopped, an operation for stopping the left reel 2L at a predetermined stop operation timing corresponding to the type of winning combination is performed. By performing, it is possible to win nine winning combinations.

  In addition, as described above, when the operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning and the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) winning is set to the predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination, the falling replay is related. Both the navigation effect and the navigation effect related to the nine-piece role include, for example, red information that recalls “red” corresponding to the “red 7” symbol, and white information that recalls “white” corresponding to the “white 7” symbol. , Using information notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display 51, a predetermined lamp, a predetermined 7-segment display, etc.) that can specify the black information reminiscent of “black” corresponding to the “BAR” symbol. You may comprise so that it may be performed by the common alerting | reporting aspect by alert | reporting any of red information, white information, and black information.

  The red information is, for example, an effect of displaying a red character mainly using red on the liquid crystal display 51, or an effect of lighting a lamp capable of specifying red (for example, lighting a lamp provided corresponding to red) Alternatively, the lighting color may be red). Similarly, white information is an effect of displaying a white character mainly using white color or an effect of lighting a lamp capable of specifying white (for example, lighting a lamp provided corresponding to white or lighting color) The black information is an effect of displaying a black character mainly using black or an effect of lighting a lamp capable of specifying black (for example, provided for black). The lamp may be turned on or the lighting color may be black.

  Specifically, for example, when the falling replay (1) is won, the falling replay (1) is performed on the condition that the red reel 2R is stopped at a timing at which it is not possible to draw “red 7” into the winning line. Since the “Red 7” can be avoided, the black information that reminds of “Black” corresponding to the “BAR” symbol arranged at the timing where the “Red 7” cannot be drawn into the winning line is informed. You may perform a navigation effect by alert | reporting by a means. Similarly, red information reminiscent of “red” corresponding to the “red 7” symbol when winning the fall replay (2), and “white 7” symbol when winning the falling replay (3) The navigation effect may be executed by notifying white information reminiscent of “white” to be performed by the information notification means. In addition, when the nine-piece combination (1) is won, the nine-piece combination (1) is awarded on the condition that the left reel 2L is stopped at a timing at which “red 7” can be drawn into the winning line. Therefore, the navigation effect may be executed by notifying red information reminiscent of “red” corresponding to the “red 7” symbol by the notifying means. Similarly, white information that recalls “white” corresponding to the “white 7” symbol when winning nine (2) roles, and “BAR” symbol when winning nine (3) symbols. The navigation effect may be executed by notifying the black information reminiscent of the corresponding “black” by the information notification means.

  Thereby, it is not necessary to specify whether the information regarding the color notified by the navigation effect is information for avoiding the fall replay or information for winning the nine-piece roles (1) to (9). By stopping the reels 2L to 2R according to the information related to the color notified in a common notification mode by the information notification means, it is possible to avoid the falling replay winning and to win the winning nine-piece combination.

  In addition, as for the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9), as in the case of the fall replay, the winning combination can be won on the condition that the winning combination is in accordance with the type of combination of the winning combinations. May be. For example, when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop order corresponding to the combination of winning combinations, the corresponding nine winning combinations can be won, and when a stop operation other than the predetermined stop order is performed Reel control may be performed so that nine winning combinations cannot be won.

  This eliminates the need for so-called pressing in both cases of avoiding the falling replay winning and winning the nine-piece winning combination, thereby reducing the player's burden associated with the stop operation.

  In addition, as described above, when the operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning and the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) winning is set in a predetermined stop order according to the type of the winning combination, the navigation related to the falling replay is performed. Both the effect and the navigation effect relating to the 9-piece combination are, for example, information notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display 51, a predetermined lamp, a predetermined 7-segment display, etc.) for notifying the stop order information that recalls the stop order. ) May be configured to be executed in a common notification mode by notifying the stop order.

  The stop order information corresponds to, for example, an effect of displaying the stop order on the liquid crystal display 51 (for example, a message such as “left” is displayed when the first reel to be stopped is the left reel 2L), and each of the reels 2L to 2R. The effect of lighting the lamp in such a manner that the stop order can be specified (for example, the lamp corresponding to the left reel 2L is lit when the first reel to be stopped is the left reel 2L) may be used.

  Thereby, it is not necessary to specify whether the stop order information notified by the navigation effect is information for avoiding the fall replay or information for winning the 9-piece combination (1) to (9). By stopping the reels 2L to 2R according to the stop order information notified in a common notification mode by the information notification means, it is possible to avoid the falling replay winning and to win the winning nine-piece combination.

  (C) In the total number corresponding notification lottery in the above-described embodiment, an example in which lottery is performed according to the total number of granted points updated in S10 of FIG. 22 has been described. However, the total number corresponding notification lottery may be configured to perform lottery according to the total number of notification points updated in S9 of FIG. In the total number corresponding notification lottery in this case, the tables shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B are referred to, and whether or not to notify and whether or not to give the granted point accurately are notified so far. The probability is determined according to the total number of points. Further, in the total number corresponding notification lottery in this case, it is determined to notify at a high rate when the total number of notification points is smaller than when the total number of notification points is large, and at a high rate, depending on the grant points or the grant points The notification point is determined so as to notify that a close point has been given. On the other hand, the smaller the total number of notification points, the higher the degree of attention the player has on whether or not the points have been notified. Therefore, at a stage where the player's attention level with respect to the point giving effect is high, the player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of security corresponding to the given points at a high rate.

  (D) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which whether or not to execute a navigation effect that can identify the type of a winning nine-sheet combination during non-ART is determined every time the nine-piece combination is won. explained. However, during non-ART, whether or not to execute a navigation effect that can identify the type of the winning 9-sheet combination is determined when the 9-port combination is won in the non-ART when controlled by the non-ART. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute. In this case, in the non-ART determined to execute the navigation effect, the navigation effect corresponding to the type of the 9 winning combination is always executed when winning the 9 winning combination. Thereby, every time it is controlled to non-ART, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for being controlled to non-ART in which a nine-stage navigation effect is executed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the gaming state in which the navigation effect is executed at the time of winning the nine winning combinations is RT regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. However, for example, if the special event that triggers the transition to RT is not the event that is derived when the nine-card combination is missed, even in the preparation mode, the navigation is performed when the nine-card combination is selected regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. You may comprise so that an effect may be performed. Thereby, the discomfort with respect to not being controlled by AT can be reduced further.

  (E) In the point-related processing in the above-described embodiment, even if the total number of granted points updated in S10 is an upper limit, if the total number of notification points updated in S9 is not the upper limit, S3 and subsequent steps You may comprise so that a process may be performed. Thereby, even after the total number of granted points has reached the upper limit, when the total number of notification points has not reached the upper limit, the same control as before the total number of given points has reached the upper limit is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the point giving effect is not executed after the total number of given points reaches the upper limit. Note that when the total number of notification points reaches the upper limit, the point-related processing may not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being performed.

  (F) In the embodiment described above, in the notice lottery in S4 and S6 of FIG. 22, the degree of advantage for the player is lower than the grant points set in S2, that is, points below the grant points are determined as the notice points. An example to be described. However, if the notification points determined in the notification lottery in S4 and S6 of FIG. 22 are determined from points whose total number of notification points is not equal to or greater than the total number of granted points even after notification, S2 The player may be configured such that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than the grant points set in Step 1, that is, the points more than the grant points are determined as notification points.

  FIG. 34 is an example of a table used in the notification lottery, and is a diagram for explaining a table in which more points than the given points can be determined as notification points in the difference number corresponding notification lottery.

  Also in the difference number corresponding notification lottery in this modification, the lot number determination whether or not to notify the point according to the difference number is performed with reference to the difference number correspondence table A of FIG. The difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 34A is the same as the table in FIG.

  When it is decided to notify with reference to the difference correspondence table A in FIG. 34 (a), the granted points set in S2 with reference to the difference correspondence table B in FIG. 34 (b). In accordance with the difference number, a lottery for determining the notification points is performed.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “0 to 1”, the total number of reporting points after reporting the current reporting point at a rate of 100% is given as the reporting point. It is determined that the post-notification difference number is “0”, which is the difference from the total number of granted points to which the given points are added. Specifically, the notification point is (difference number−difference number after notification + giving point). In this case, if the difference number is “1”, the notification point is determined as (1−0 + 1) = point “2”. In this way, more points than the given points are notified.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “2-3”, the post-notification difference number is determined to be “0” at a rate of 15%, and “1” at a rate of 25%. ”And“ 2 ”at a rate of 60%.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “4”, the post-notification difference number is determined to be “1” at a rate of 10% and is set to “2” at a rate of 20%. It is determined to be “3” at a rate of 30% and “4” at a rate of 40%.

  Hereinafter, similarly, the post-notification difference number is determined according to the distribution rate specified from the granted point and the difference number, and the notification point is determined by calculating (difference−post-notification difference number + grant point). The

  For example, when the granted point is “3” and the difference number is “3” and “1” is determined as the difference number after notification, (3-1 + 3) = point “5” is determined as the notification point. To be determined.

  As described above, when a lottery is performed using a table in which more points than the granted points can be determined as notification points, for example, even when the difference number becomes too large, the player is more likely than the granted points. By reporting a point with a high degree of advantage as a reporting point, the difference number can be reduced. For this reason, it is possible to easily improve the reliability of the total number of notification points.

  (G) The navigation effects related to the fall replay and the navigation effects related to the nine-piece roles (1) to (9) in the embodiment described above are common by displaying a message for specifying the operation procedure on the liquid crystal display 51. The example performed by the alerting | reporting aspect was demonstrated. However, the configuration for executing the navigation effect is any one that can execute the predetermined effect in a common notification mode, such as a predetermined lamp mounted on the slot machine or a predetermined 7-segment display. There may be.

  (H) In the embodiment described above, the fall replay that is a re-gamer is set as the winning combination that triggers the preparation mode or RT, and the navigation effect is executed at a predetermined rate even in the case of non-ART. The example in which the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) are set as the winning combinations. However, the winning combination that triggers the completion of the preparation mode or RT is not limited to the re-playing combination, but may be a predetermined small combination, a single bonus that controls the next game as a bonus by winning. In addition, the winning combination in which the navigation effect is executed at a predetermined ratio even if it is non-ART is not limited to a small combination, but may be a predetermined re-playing combination, a single bonus, or the like.

  (I) In the first AT lottery in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, the higher the normal number of granted points and the total number of bonus granted points, the higher the rate is controlled by the AT. In this example, the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by determining a larger number of navigation stocks. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player by being controlled by the AT at a high rate and being determined to have a higher number of navigation stocks at a high rate.

  In this case, even when the above-described point grant condition is not satisfied, the point grant effect may be executed as if a point was granted. Moreover, you may comprise so that a point provision effect may be performed as if the point provision conditions were satisfied and more points were provided than the point actually provided. Further, whether or not to execute such a point grant effect may be determined with a different probability depending on at least one of the grant points, the difference number, the total number of grant points, and the total number of notification points. .

  Thereby, even when the point granting effect is executed or when it is notified that a large number of points are given, the player is expected to expect that fewer points or points are not actually given. It is possible to hold the game, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the first AT lottery will be performed in an advantageous manner for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (J) In the first AT lottery in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the AT lottery is performed so as to be more advantageous for the player as the total number of normal granted points or the total number of bonus points is increased has been described. Instead, when the total number of granted points is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, “0”), the AT lottery is performed so as to be more advantageous to the player than when the total number of granted points is larger than the predetermined number. It may be configured. Specifically, when the total number of granted points is “0”, the AT lottery is performed at the same winning rate as when the total number of granted points is “5” or “10” which is the upper limit. May be. Thereby, the player can also have a sense of expectation that the total number of granted points is equal to or less than the predetermined number, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (K) It may be a process of clearing (for example, “0”) the number of navigation stock when the bonus is won with the number of navigation stock remaining. May be performed, a process of subtracting a predetermined number may be performed, a process of adding and adding a predetermined number may be performed, and which process is to be performed every time the bonus is won It may be determined and the determined processing is performed. Thereby, the variation when the bonus is won in the state where the number of navigation stock remains is increased, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  (L) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the number of awarded points is not subtracted has been described. You may comprise. In this case, the number of points actually subtracted may be notified as the number of subtracted points, or the number of points larger than the number of points actually subtracted may be notified. As for whether to notify the number of points actually subtracted or the number of points greater than the number of points actually subtracted, at least one of grant points, difference numbers, grant points, report points Accordingly, it may be configured to determine with different probabilities. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of tension to the point being subtracted even after the point is awarded, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (M) In the first AT lottery and the second AT lottery in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the expected value for the length controlled by the AT has been described. However, in the 1st AT lottery and the 2nd AT lottery, not only the number of navigation stocks but also the probability (intrusion rate) controlled by the AT and a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) are used and the AT is controlled again after the AT is finished. You may comprise so that the probability (continuation rate) to do may be determined. In this case, it is determined whether or not the AT is controlled according to the rush rate determined in the AT lottery, and the AT is controlled according to the continuation rate determined in the AT lottery when the predetermined number of games are digested and the AT is completed. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the AT is continued until a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) are consumed when controlled by the AT has been described. You may comprise so that the said AT may be continued until the frequency | count that a navigation effect was performed reaches | attains predetermined number (for example, 10 times etc.).

  (N) An example in which a predetermined number of points are notified 100% when winning a strawberry (1) and a strawberry (2) that satisfy the 100% point grant condition by winning when they are in a high probability state has been described. However, not limited to this, a predetermined number of points are notified by winning and winning, or by appearing a winner that is stopped only when winning the strawberry shown in FIG. 18 (b), If you win but don't win, you may be notified according to the notification lottery.

  (O) In the above-described embodiment, for example, when a winning operation is performed at a timing at which the type of 9 winning combinations can be drawn with respect to when 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) are selected, An example in which a control that increases the player's advantage in terms of generating 9 winning combinations and paying out 9 medals than when stopping at an operation timing that cannot be pulled in, or winning a fall replay When the stop operation is performed in the avoidance procedure for avoiding the falling replay winning according to the type of replay that has been won at the same time, for example, when the stop operation is performed in the avoidance procedure, the RT An example in which control is performed to increase the degree of advantage for the player in that the point is continued has been described. However, the control that increases the degree of advantage for the player may be, for example, the following control.

    (O-1) For example, in the case where different types of small combinations with different medal payout numbers associated with winning can be won simultaneously, operation is performed in a procedure different from a predetermined advantageous procedure according to the types of small combinations that are simultaneously selected It is also possible to perform a control for winning a small role with a small medal payout number when the medals are accepted, and a control for winning a small role with a large medal payout number when an operation is accepted in an advantageous procedure. As a result, in a game in which small types of small medals with different medal payout numbers are simultaneously won, the game value that a player acquires when operated by an advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases in terms of increase in the number.

    (O-2) For example, in the preparation mode, a game state (for example, even if a special outcome is derived) that is disadvantageous to the player when winning one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) It is controlled to so-called disadvantage RT, such as a state that is not controlled by RT, a state where the replay winning probability is lower than RT, and a special outcome that can be derived when 9 roles (1) to (9) are missed is derived Then, the game state (for example, RT) that is advantageous to the player is controlled, and when the player is elected to one of the nine-player combinations (1) to (9) in the AT preparation mode, the nine-player combination is selected. In the slot machine that is configured to execute the corresponding navigation effect and executes the navigation effect corresponding to the type in the AT preparation mode at the time of winning the nine role combination, the operation timing at which the type of the selected nine role combination can be drawn stop When operated, the 9-piece combination is won to shift to an unfavorable gaming state, and when the selected 9-type combination is stopped at an operation timing that cannot be drawn, the 9-piece combination is dropped and the 9-medal is paid out. However, it is possible to control the RT so that a special outcome is derived and the player is in an advantageous state. As a result, apart from the degree of advantage in the game in which nine winning combinations are won in the AT preparation mode, the winning nine winning combination is more when the type of the winning nine winning combination is stopped at an operation timing that cannot be drawn. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in that it is controlled by RT in the game after the game, compared to when the stop operation is performed at the operation timing at which this type can be drawn.

  In addition, for example, the above-mentioned replay is a small one with a single payout, and a fall replay is a specific small with a medal payout greater than one. In the case where BAR replay is won simultaneously in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment, and a specific small role winning can be avoided by a stop procedure corresponding to the combination of simultaneous winnings, When an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the winning combination (see FIG. 18 (a)), a winning of a specific small role occurs and RT ends, and the advantageous procedure corresponding to a predetermined result When the operation is accepted, a winning of one small role may be generated and the RT may be maintained. Thus, apart from the degree of advantage in the game won for a specific small role during RT, the procedure when avoiding the specific small role winning is different from the procedure for avoiding the specific small role winning. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in that the RT is maintained without ending in the game after the game than when the game is operated.

    (O-3) For example, in a slot machine in which each of 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) and melon can be won simultaneously, when any of 9 winning combinations and melon are simultaneously won, 9 winning winning combinations When an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the combination of melon and melon, nine winning combinations are won at a predetermined non-advantage ratio (for example, 1/9), and the operation is accepted in the advantageous procedure Alternatively, control may be performed to win the melon at a predetermined advantageous rate (100%) higher than a predetermined non-advantageous rate. As a result, if any of the 9 winning combinations and melons are won at the same time, 9 medals will be obtained at a higher rate when operated by the advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. In terms of what can be done, it can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases.

  Also, for example, in a slot machine in which each of the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) and melon can be won simultaneously, when any of the 9 winning combinations and melon are simultaneously won, When the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the combination of the above, a 9-piece combination with a predetermined non-advantage amount (9-medal payout) at a predetermined non-advantage rate (for example, 1/9) When a prize is awarded and an operation is accepted by an advantageous procedure, a melon with a predetermined advantageous amount (9-medal payout) is awarded at a predetermined advantageous rate (for example, 100%), and (advantageous rate) ) × (advantageous amount)> (non-advantageous ratio) × (non-advantageous amount). As a result, when any of the 9 winning combinations and melons are won at the same time, the amount of game value that the player earns when operated by an advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is high in that the expected value of becomes high.

  (P) In the embodiment described above, notification conditions (for example, FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, various ratios) with different degrees of advantage for the player are set according to the total number of granted points, and the first AT lottery is performed according to the notification conditions. An example of performing is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the AT is controlled over the length uniquely identified from the total number of granted points (the number of navigation stocks, the period for digesting the predetermined number of games, the period for executing the navigation effect a predetermined number of times, etc.). The first AT lottery may be performed.

  For example, in the first AT lottery, the number of navigation stocks may be set uniquely from the total number of granted points. More specifically, a predetermined number (for example, 1) is set as the number of navigation stock with respect to a predetermined number (for example, 2) for the total number of granted points. For example, when the total number of granted points is “6”, (6/2) "may be set.

  Further, as another example in the first AT lottery, the number of games that can be uniquely controlled by the AT may be set from the total number of granted points. More specifically, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is set as the number of games that can be controlled by the AT with respect to a predetermined number (for example, 1). You may comprise so that "60 (6x10)" may be set as the number of games which can be controlled. Even in the case of such a configuration, the same effect as described above is obtained.

Other Modifications (1) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17 (b) and 17 (c), the fall per game is more in the preparation mode than in the RT mode. The example in which the number of determination values is set so that the replay winning rate is high has been described. However, the winning rate of fall replay per game may be set to be higher in RT than in preparation mode.

  For example, the number of determination values for fall replay per game in the preparation mode and RT may be set to the number of determination values shown in FIGS. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing each lottery target combination and the number of determination values acquired based on the gaming state and the set value in the modified example. 35 (a), (d), and (e) are the same as the number of determination values shown in FIGS. 17 (a), (d), and (e), respectively, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 35B is a diagram showing the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery for each of replay, fall replay, and BAR replay when the gaming state is a preparation mode controlled after the bonus ends. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “105” is replay + tumbling replay + BAR replay when the target of the internal lottery is replay, and “8880” is replay + falling replay. Sometimes “8880” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  FIG. 35 (c) shows a case where RT is controlled by stopping the special game when the gaming state is in the preparation mode, and is acquired in the internal lottery of each of replay, fall replay, and BAR replay. It is a figure which shows the number of judgment values. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “15000” is “replay + tumbling replay + BAR replay” when the target character of the internal lottery is replay, and “16450” is replay + tumbling replay. Sometimes “16450” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  Even in the case where the number of determination values is set in this way, the same effect can be obtained in the configuration common to the above-described embodiment. That is, the winning rate of the fall replay per game is 5120 / 65536≈8% in the normal gaming state, and 17760 / 65536≈in the preparation mode, based on the total number of fall replay determination values. 27%, 32900 / 65536≈50% when RT, and 10000 / 65536≈15% when inside RT. As a result, the winning rate of the fall replay per game is such that even if the fall replay wins, the game state is maintained and the normal game state is achieved by winning the fall replay than in the case of the internal RT. It is set to be higher in the preparation mode that suffers the disadvantage of being controlled by the system and in the RT mode.

  In addition, the appearance rate of the special appearance per game in the preparation mode is (9000/65536) × (8/9) ≈12% based on the number of judgment values of 9 roles (1) to (9) and the missing rate. It becomes. That is, even in the case where the number of determination values shown in FIG. 35 is set, in the preparation mode, the winning rate of the fall replay is set to be higher than the appearance rate of the special appearance. For this reason, in the preparation mode, it can be said that there is a high possibility of winning the fall replay before the special outcome is stopped. Therefore, for example, in the non-AT preparation mode, it can be said that it is easy to control to the normal gaming state by winning a fall replay.

  In addition, when focusing on the winning rate of falling replay per game, the winning rate of falling replay per game is set to be higher in RT than in the preparation mode. . Thereby, in RT, the possibility of winning a fall replay and winning a prize can be further increased than in the preparation mode. Therefore, for example, in the case of non-ART, it can be said that it is easier to control to the normal gaming state by winning the fall replay than in the non-AT preparation mode.

  Further, even when the reel control related to the fall replay shown in FIG. First, since the win rate for the fall replay per game when in the preparation mode is 27%, the winning rate for the fall replay is 13.5% in consideration of the reel control shown in FIG. . Therefore, the average number of games in the non-AT preparation mode that can be digested without winning the fall replay is about 7.4 games from the fall rate of the fall replay. As a result, it is possible to prevent the preparation mode from being continuously controlled over a long period of time even though the performance state is not controlled by the AT, and the preparation mode is hardly maintained, and the normal gaming state is controlled. Can be made easier.

  Also, the drop replay winning rate when in the preparation mode is still higher than 12% of the appearance rate of the special event that triggers the RT control. For this reason, in the preparation mode, even if the probability of accidentally dropping the fall replay is taken into account, it can be said that there is a high possibility of winning the fall replay before the special outcome is stopped. For this reason, when in the non-AT preparation mode, the internal winning situation cannot be grasped, and the fall replay is performed before the special outcome is stopped based on the winning rate of the fall fall and the appearance rate of the special outcome. Since the possibility of winning and winning is increased, it can be easily controlled to the normal gaming state and difficult to be controlled by RT.

  On the other hand, when in the AT preparation mode, the internal winning situation can be grasped, and even if the winning rate of the falling replay has a high probability, the falling replay winning can be intentionally avoided. For this reason, when in the AT preparation mode, it is possible to avoid the control to the normal gaming state, and it is possible to control the RT as a result by stopping the special game.

  That is, a preparation mode is provided as a previous game state controlled to RT advantageous for the player, and when the performance state in the preparation mode is not controlled by the AT, it is easy to control from the preparation mode to the normal game state. Thus, it is difficult to control to RT, and when the effect state in the preparation mode is controlled to AT, RT can be surely controlled. For this reason, the difference in the degree of advantage for the player can be increased depending on whether or not the performance state in the preparation mode is controlled by the AT, so that a sense of expectation that the performance state is controlled by the AT can be given. It can be increased effectively and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, since the winning rate of the fall replay per game during RT is 50%, the reel replay winning rate is 25% in consideration of the reel control shown in FIG. Therefore, the average number of non-ART games that can be digested without winning a fall replay is about 4 games based on the win rate of the fall replay. As a result, even if the performance state is not controlled by the AT, even if it is fortunately controlled by the RT, it is possible to prevent the RT from being continuously controlled over a long period of time and to enter the normal gaming state. It can be easily controlled.

  On the other hand, when it is ART, the internal winning situation can be grasped, and even if the winning rate of the falling replay has a high probability, the falling replay winning can be intentionally avoided. For this reason, when it is ART, it can avoid being controlled to a normal game state, and RT can be maintained as a result.

  That is, even if the non-preparation mode is fortunately controlled to non-ART, it is difficult to maintain RT by making it easy to be controlled in the normal gaming state, and RT can be reliably continued when in ART. For this reason, the difference in the degree of advantage for the player can be increased depending on whether or not the performance state in RT is controlled by the AT, so that a sense of expectation for the fact that the performance state is controlled by the AT is effective. Can increase the interest of the game.

  As described above, the slot machine in which the number of judgment values is set so that the winning rate of the fall replay per game is higher in the preparation mode than in the RT may be used. An example has been described in which a slot machine in which the number of determination values is set so as to be higher at RT than at a certain time has been described. However, the combination of the RT and the preparation mode in which the number of determination values is set so as to be higher in the preparation mode than in the RT, and the combination of the RT and the preparation mode. It may be a slot machine having both the combination of the RT and the preparation mode in which the number of determination values is set so as to increase.

  For example, a plurality of types of preparation modes and RTs are provided. For example, after the first type of special gaming state (for example, big bonus) is finished, the first type of preparation mode is controlled. When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the first type of RT is controlled. When a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the preparation mode and RT, the normal gaming state is controlled, while the second type of special gaming state (eg, regular bonus) ends. Later, the game is controlled to the second type of preparation mode. When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied in the second type of preparation mode, the second type of RT is controlled. When the predetermined end condition is satisfied in the preparation mode and RT, the normal game In the slot machine controlled by the state, the combination of the first type of preparation mode and the first type of RT The number of determination values is set so as to be higher in the preparation mode than in the RT, and the combination of the second type of preparation mode and the second type of RT is more than in the preparation mode. Alternatively, the number of determination values may be set so that the value at RT is higher. Thereby, a player's expectation can be made different with respect to which kind of preparation mode is controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the preparation mode has been described as an example in which the preparation mode is ended by winning a fall replay and is controlled to the normal gaming state. Alternatively, control may be continued in the preparation mode. That is, the preparation mode may be controlled continuously until the special event is stopped, or a bonus is won or won. In this case, for example, the reel control for stopping the special output is performed only when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated in a specific operation procedure corresponding to each type of nine winning combinations in the preparation mode. In addition, a configuration is made to perform a navigation effect for notifying information that can specify the type of the nine-piece combination or a specific operation procedure corresponding to the type of the nine-piece combination when winning the nine-piece combination only in the AT preparation mode. May be. Thus, similar to the above-described embodiment, the appearance rate of the special appearance differs depending on whether or not the AT is controlled in the preparation mode. For example, the special appearance is stopped when controlled by the AT. However, when it is not controlled by the AT, it is difficult to stop the special eye and it is difficult to control by the RT. As a result, it is possible to give the player a degree of advantage for the player depending on whether or not the AT is controlled in the preparation mode, effectively increasing the expectation of being controlled in the AT preparation mode, and increasing the interest of the game. Can be improved.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the number of navigation stocks is consumed to control the AT while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times has been described. You may make it consume 1 whenever it performs. The number of navigation stocks may be any value as long as it is a value that specifies the period of time controlled by the AT at RT.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the same table (see FIG. 28D) is used in the non-AT preparation mode and in the non-ART in the second AT lottery executed by the predetermined number of games. Although the example to be used has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, but a table having a different degree of advantage between the non-AT preparation mode and the non-ART mode, that is, the ratio determined by the probability of winning an AT and a larger number of navigation stocks Alternatively, the second AT lottery may be performed using a table with different numbers. Thus, if the second AT lottery that is more advantageous in the non-AT preparation mode than in the non-ART is performed, the RT in the preparation mode is RT. The loss due to low replay winning probability can be compensated. Further, when the second AT lottery that is more advantageous in the non-ART mode than in the non-AT preparation mode is performed, the degree of advantage during the RT can be increased.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, in the second AT lottery executed by the predetermined number of times of game digestion, the ratio controlled by AT and the ratio determined by a larger number of navigation stocks are stepwise according to game digestion. The example which becomes high was demonstrated. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the game will be digested as many times as possible without winning a fall replay during non-AT, and the interest of the game can be improved. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second AT lottery executed by game digestion a predetermined number of times, the ratio controlled by AT or the ratio determined by a larger number of navigation stocks becomes lower step by step according to game digestion. It may be. As a result, a sense of expectation for winning an AT at the earliest possible stage during non-AT can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, the gaming state when the bonus is won is the preparation mode, the RT, the normal gaming state, the performance state is AT, or the probability state is high. Although an example in which the first AT lottery is performed using a table having the same degree of advantage for a player regardless of whether it is in a probability state, the game state when a bonus is won is not limited to this, and the game state is a preparation mode Or RT, normal gaming state, performance state is AT, or probability state is a high probability state, the table has a different degree of advantage for the player You may make it perform 1st AT lottery using. In the embodiment described above, the example in which the second AT lottery is performed using the table having the same degree of advantage for the player regardless of whether or not the player is in the AT when the bonus is won in the preparation mode has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second AT lottery may be performed using a table having a different degree of advantage for the player depending on whether or not the AT is in progress. In addition, an example in which the second AT lottery is performed using a table having a different degree of advantage for the player according to whether or not the bonus is won in RT has been described. Regardless of whether or not there is, the second AT lottery may be performed using a table having the same degree of advantage for the player.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the RT may be terminated by digesting a prescribed game (for example, 100 games). Further, the RT may be controlled so that the degree of advantage (replay winning rate, prescribed number of games) varies depending on the type of special event. Thereby, the variation of RT can be made abundant and the interest of a game can be improved.

  (8) In the embodiment described above, an example in which the reel control for stopping the special game on the winning line is performed only when the 9-card combination is missed regardless of the game state is won. did. However, the reel control for stopping the special game at the winning line may be performed only when the 9-card combination is missed when the 9-card combination is won and the game state is the preparation mode. Good. Thereby, in spite of the special game being stopped in the normal gaming state, it is not controlled by RT, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that causes confusion for the player.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the special game is not controlled by the RT even when the special game is stopped in the normal game state has been described. You may comprise so that it may be controlled by RT with low probability. Also, RT is only performed when a special outcome (for example, red 7-blank (1) -blank (1) among the special outcomes shown in FIG. 15B) is stopped in the normal gaming state. You may comprise so that it may be controlled by. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for being directly controlled to RT from the normal gaming state.

  (9) In the embodiment described above, in the AT lottery, the number of special navigation stocks controlled by the AT until the bonus is won may be determined. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning the number of special navigation stocks. In this case, the number of special navigation stocks may be won with a higher probability in the AT lottery when the bonus is won in the preparation mode than when the bonus is won in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of special navigation stocks may be won with a higher probability in the AT lottery when a bonus is won in the preparation mode than when a bonus is won in RT. Thereby, it is possible to add a premier to winning a bonus in the preparation mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, in a game where a special role is won and a small role with a payout number of 3 or more (hereinafter referred to as a normal small role) is won, The combination of symbols corresponding to the normal small combination is preferentially derived, and a small combination (hereinafter referred to as a specific small combination) in which the number of payouts is smaller than 3 is provided when the special combination is won. In a game in which the specific small role is won, reel control is performed in which the symbol combination corresponding to the big bonus or the regular bonus is given priority over the symbol combination corresponding to the specific small role. An example was described. In addition to such reel control, the following reel control may be performed.

  When an equivalent small combination with the same number of medals as the number of bets and a special combination are selected, for example, reel control may be performed so that the equivalent small combination is preferentially won over the special combination. Thereby, the next game can be started with the medals that are awarded to the equivalent small role and paid out, and the player can be expected to win the normal small role in the game. Further, when the equivalent small combination and the special combination are elected, the reel control may be performed so that the special combination is preferentially won over the equivalent small combination. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of games and medals required for winning a special combination.

  Also, the number of medals paid out changes according to the number of winning lines like strawberry, for example, for a special small role that may be less than the number of bets or more than the number of bets, When a special role is elected, the special small role is given priority over the special role when operated in an operating procedure that allows the special small role to be awarded so that the number of payouts is greater than the number of bets. The special role is given priority over the special small role when it is operated according to the operating procedure that allows the special small role to be awarded so that the number of payouts is less than the number of bets. Reel control may be performed so as to win a prize. Thereby, taking into account the operation procedure, it is possible to reduce as much as possible that the display result that is a disadvantageous game result for the player is derived, and the display result that is advantageous to the player is given priority. Can be derived.

  In addition, in a game where a special role is won and a small role is selected, a symbol combination corresponding to the small role is selected rather than the special role regardless of the number of payouts of the selected small role. Reel control that is preferentially derived may be performed.

  Further, the normal small combination and the specific small combination may be simultaneously read out as the lottery target combination to be selected. In this case, for example, when a special small role and a specific small role are elected in a state where the special role winning is carried over, the special role, the normal small role, and the specific small role are selected. At the same time, it will be a winning situation. In this case, reel control is performed so that the normal small role is given priority over the special role and the specified small role, and when the normal small role cannot be won, the special role is given priority over the specific small role. The reel control may be performed so that the reel control is performed to win a specific small combination when the normal small combination and the special combination cannot be won. As a result, even when the normal small combination and the specific small combination are won at the same time, it is possible to reduce the display result that is a disadvantageous game result for the player as much as possible, which is advantageous for the player. A display result as a game result can be preferentially derived.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a chance effect for notifying that it is a chance timing for winning a bonus after notifying the bonus winning has been described. The chance effect may be configured to perform a navigation effect that informs the player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as the type of bonus that has been won and the operation procedure for winning the bonus.

  (12) In the industry where the slot machines in the above-described embodiments are distributed, inspection (type test) by a third party is required at the pre-shipment stage, and the predetermined standard is satisfied in the type test. There is a special situation that only the determined model is allowed to be shipped to the game hall. Further, in recent years, in order to prevent the shooting ability from being increased too much, it is required to be able to perform a test assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by a player. Yes.

  Therefore, in the slot machine in the above-described embodiment, in consideration of such special circumstances and needs, a test is performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. “Output means” for outputting “information that can be performed” may be further provided. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 36, the game control board, the effect control board, and the input / output board will be described as an example of “output means”, and the recommended operation procedure information will be referred to as “the slot machine is shipped to the market and the player actually As an example of “information that can be tested on the assumption that a game is played”. FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing an example of a control circuit of a slot machine equipped with a test apparatus 1200 for performing a type test and an input / output board 1100 for inputting / outputting test information used for the test.

  The test information output from the slot machine 1 to the test apparatus 1200 includes, as shown in FIG. 36, winning status information for specifying the game start and winning status, and the rotational positions of the reel motors 32L to 32R (for example, Recommendations that are expected to be actually operated by the player in consideration of the rotational position information for specifying the step number of the predetermined position, the area number of the symbol located in the lower stage, etc., the presence or absence of navigation effects, etc. The recommended operation procedure information for specifying the operation procedure is included. Note that the test information output from the slot machine 1 to the test apparatus 1200 includes winning information for specifying that a winning has occurred and the type of the winning, payout information for specifying that a medal has been paid out, and the like. , Other information included.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 36, the test information input from the test apparatus 1200 to the slot machine 1 includes game start information for starting a game such as setting a bet number and reel rotation for starting a game, reels, and the like. The game end information for ending the game such as stopping the game is included.

  The input / output board 1100 mounted on the slot machine 1 includes a connector 1101 for electrically connecting to the game control board 40, a connector 1102 for electrically connecting to the effect control board 90, and a test apparatus 1200. A connector 1103 for electrical connection is provided. The type test described above is performed by inputting / outputting various types of information in a state where the input / output board 100 and the test apparatus 1200 are connected by a connector. Hereinafter, the flow and operation of various information when the type test is performed will be specifically described.

  First, the test apparatus 1200 outputs game start information in order to start a game in the slot machine 1. The game start information is input to the game control board 40 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the main control part 41 of the game control board 40, the process for starting a game (the bet number setting, the lottery process, the reel rotation process, etc. in the BET process) is performed.

  And the main control part 41 of the game control board 40 produces | generates and outputs winning condition information at the time of a game start. The corresponding selection status information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. As a result, the test apparatus 1200 can specify that the game has started and the winning situation.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 generates and outputs rotational position information according to the reel rotation. The rotational position information is information for specifying a step existing at a predetermined position among 168 steps of each of the reel motors 32L to 32R, for example, and is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, the current rotation position can be specified for each of the reels 2L to 2R.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 generates and outputs recommended operation procedure information according to the winning situation or the like. The recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, the recommended operation procedure can be specified.

  Based on the current rotation position of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the rotation position information, the test apparatus 1200 provides game end information for stopping each of the reels 2L to 2R in the recommended operation procedure specified from the recommended operation procedure information. Generate and output. The game end information is input to the game control board 40 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the main control part 41 of the game control board 40, each of the reels 2L to 2R is stopped according to the game end information, and a process (reel rotation process, winning determination process, payout process, etc.) for ending the game is performed. Do. Thereby, each of the reels 2L to 2R can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  As described above, information is repeatedly input / output between the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100, and the game can be automatically repeated. As a result, the type test for the slot machine 1 can be automatically performed.

  As described above, the recommended operation procedure may be information for enabling the test to be performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. For example, the recommended operation procedure is an operation procedure for deriving a symbol combination to be actually stopped by the player by a game effect (for example, a chance effect) that informs information related to the winning situation. When the game effect for notifying the information related to is not performed, a predetermined operation procedure (a procedure for minimizing the small part missing, so-called DDT hitting method, KKK hitting method, etc.) may be used.

  Specifically, the recommended operation procedure is a bonus in which a symbol combination to be actually stopped when the chance effect described above is executed, and therefore, an operation procedure for deriving the combination of the bonus. Say. Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, when the current rotation position of each of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the rotation position information becomes the position of each of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the recommended operation procedure information, the corresponding reel The game end information for stopping the game is output. As a result, each of the reels 2L to 2R can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure, and a bonus winning winning in the slot machine 1 can be generated.

  As a result, in the test apparatus to which the recommended operation procedure information is input, the recommended operation procedure for deriving the symbol combination to be actually stopped by the player by the game effect informing the information related to the winning situation is specified. can do. As a result, the type test can be performed based on the results of operation according to the recommended operating procedure, so the test should be performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. Can do.

  In addition, the recommended operation procedure when the game effect that informs the information related to the winning situation is not performed is a predetermined operation procedure (in the case of including a predetermined small role that is missed by the operation procedure) It is also possible to use a procedure for minimizing missing, so-called DDT method, KKK method, etc. For example, it is conceivable that a player who has not recognized whether or not a bonus has been won usually performs a stop operation so that a predetermined small role can be won as much as possible. This is because it is possible to minimize the possibility of losing the selected small part that has been won. That is, the stop operation is performed so that the predetermined small role can be won, so that, for example, when the predetermined small role is won, it is more reliable when the predetermined small role is won. Can win a prize, and if you have not won a given small role and have won another small role (for example, a small role that has not been missed), you can pull in the selected small role, This is because the possibility of being missed can be minimized. Accordingly, for example, compared with an operation procedure in which a predetermined small role cannot be won, the possibility of losing a small role is reduced by performing a stop operation in an operation procedure for winning a predetermined small role. it can.

  Note that the recommended operation procedure when the game effect for notifying the information related to the winning situation is not performed may be an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting). This is because when the game effect is not performed, it is considered that the player can proceed with the game without pressing in consideration of speeding up the game. The recommended operation procedure information in this case is information that can specify the region numbers 0 to 20 for each of the reels 2L to 2R.

  Thereby, in the test apparatus to which the recommended operation procedure information is input, even when the game effect for notifying the information related to the winning situation is not performed, the symbol combination to be actually stopped by the player The recommended operation procedure for deriving can be identified. As a result, since the type test can be performed based on the result of operation according to the recommended operation procedure, it is not during the so-called AT assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. You can also test for time.

  Note that the recommended operation procedure information that is output when a game effect that informs the information related to the winning situation is not performed is a predetermined operation procedure (a procedure for minimizing a small part missing, so-called DDT batting method, KKK batting For example, the first information for specifying a method and the like and the second information for specifying an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting) may be output. As a result, the test apparatus 1200 can perform a test when a game effect that informs information related to the winning situation is not performed using the first information or the second information as necessary. It is possible to perform a test when a game effect for notifying information related to the winning situation is not performed in a state closer to the case where the game is played by the player.

  The sub-control unit 91 outputs, for example, a first strobe signal based on the internal winning command and the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, and outputs data for specifying the region number for the left reel 2L, The second strobe signal is output, data for specifying the region number for the middle reel 2C is output, and further, the third strobe signal is output, and the data for specifying the region number for the right reel 2R. To complete the output of the recommended operating procedure information. Thus, recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. On the test apparatus 1200 side, the position where each reel should be stopped can be specified from the recommended operation procedure information, and the game end information is output in consideration of the rotation position specified from the rotation position information. Each reel can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  When the recommended operation procedure includes the reel stop order, the sub control unit 91 outputs the first strobe signal based on the internal winning command and the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, for example. Data for specifying an area number for the first reel to be stopped is output, a second strobe signal is output, data for specifying an area number for the second reel to be stopped is output, and 3 is output, and data for specifying the region number for the third reel to be stopped is output, thereby completing the output of the recommended operation procedure information. Thus, recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. On the test apparatus 1200 side, in addition to the recommended operation procedure information, the reel stop order can be specified in addition to the position where each reel should be stopped, and the rotational position specified from the rotational position information is taken into consideration. The game end information can be output and each reel can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  Note that after the type test is completed, it is conceivable that an illegal act of inputting illegal information via the connector 1103 described above is performed. In order to avoid this, for example, the connector 1103 may be provided so as to be removable from the input / output board 1100, and the connector 1103 may be configured to be removable at the shipping stage. In the shipping stage, the input / output board 1100 may be shipped without being mounted. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts such as inputting unauthorized information.

  (13) In the slot machine in the above-described embodiment, the special combination and the small combination may be won simultaneously. Further, the combination of the special combination and the small combination that are won simultaneously may be as follows. Here, bonus (A) and bonus (B) are illustrated as special roles, and each of bonus (A) and (B) is a predetermined orange (combination of constituent symbols: orange-orange-orange) or plum. In the internal lottery, one of 15 small payouts such as (combination of structural symbols: plum-plum-plum) and one single payout such as 1 (1) or 1 (2) will be selected at the same time. An example will be described in which a big bonus and a small combination that are read out as a combination and are simultaneously read out can be won in duplicate. Combinations to be read out as a lottery target are orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 ( 2) Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are included. The bonus (A) and bonus (B) may be the following combinations. For example, the bonus (A) may be the big bonus (1) in the above-described embodiment, and the bonus (B) may be the big bonus (2) in the above-described embodiment.

  These bonuses (A), bonus (B), orange, plum, 1 (1), 1 (2), each symbol (combination of symbols) is 5 frames in each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. In principle, combinations that cannot be awarded unless the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated at an appropriate timing are set.

  Furthermore, the bonus (A), the orange that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (A), and the symbols (combination of symbols) that constitute each of the combinations of the symbols (1) are the maximum pull-in range in a predetermined reel. Arranged across frames. As a result, the bonus (A), the orange that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (A), and the combination of each one (1) are configured so that there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  Further, a bonus (B), a plum that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (B), and a symbol (a combination of symbols) that constitutes each role (2) are the maximum drawing range in a predetermined reel. Arranged across frames. As a result, the bonus (B), the plum that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (B), and the combination of one (2) are configured such that there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  In addition, the orange (one) (1), the plum, and the symbols (combination of symbols) that make up each of the symbols (2) are arranged beyond the maximum drawing range of 4 frames on a given reel. Therefore, there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  The slot machine including such bonus (A), bonus (B), orange, plum, 1 (1), 1 (2) as a winning combination further comprises the following configuration. May be.

  (13-1) In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific combination that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when no combination is won. When a specific role is missed, there is a suggestion that the specific role will be missed by stopping a specific stop mode that does not stop if none of the roles are elected. If the player does not know the specific stop mode that stops when he misses, he cannot know that he has missed the elected special role. It is difficult to determine whether the particular role that was missed has been missed. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are won and at the first stop (stop operation of any reel while all reels are changing) If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the orange symbol cannot be drawn into the winning line, the control of pulling the plum role symbol into any of the winning lines is performed and the remaining reels In the case where the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the composition symbol of the orange part can be drawn into the winning line where the composition part of the plum part is stopped in FIG. Control to pull in.

  In addition, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) will be selected, and the constituent symbols for the Orange will stop on any winning line at the first stop However, at the time of the second stop (when one of the two reels is fluctuating and one of the reels is stopped), the constituent symbol of the orange part is changed to the winning line where the constituent part of the orange part is stopped at the first stop. Even if it was not possible to stop at the winning line where the constituent symbols of the orange role were stopped at the time of the second stop because the stop operation was performed at the stop operation position that could not be withdrawn, When one reel is moving and the last reel is stopped), the orange line will be displayed on the winning line where the orange pattern is stopped at the first stop. If the stop operation at the stop operation position retractable configuration pattern is performed, thereby performing the control to draw a structure pattern orange combination the winning line stop structure symbol orange combination was at the first stop.

  In other words, even if orange is missed at the time of the first stop or the second stop, if the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the remaining symbols can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, Control to align a part of the combination with the winning line is performed.

  Also, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are selected and the Plum is lost at the first stop or the second stop Similar control is performed.

  Therefore, even if orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are won, and orange is missed at the first stop or second stop When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position at which the structure of the orange combination can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, a part of the combination of the orange combination is aligned with the winning line. Even when the orange is missed at the time of 2 stops, it can be easily determined whether or not the orange has been missed depending on whether or not a part of the combination of orange matches the winning line. Also, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are selected and the Plum is lost at the first stop or the second stop Has the same effect.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are won, and the orange is missed during the first stop and the second stop. In the case of an error, the symbol that is used as an indicator (the structural symbol of the plum role when it is missed during the first stop, the structural symbol of the orange role that was stopped during the first stop when it is missed during the second stop) The stop position is regarded as a stop position where the structural symbol stops, and stop control is performed using a stop control table used when orange is not missed. For this reason, a stop control table for stopping the combination of orange combinations on the winning line, and a stop for stopping a part of the combination of orange combinations on the winning line when orange is missed at the first stop and the second stop. Since there is no need to prepare a separate control table, the stop control table is used even when control is performed to align a part of the combination of oranges with the winning line when orange is missed at the first stop or the second stop. Storage capacity can be reduced. The same applies to a case where a winning combination of plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) is won.

  (13-2) In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination is selected independently and the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination and special combination are simultaneously selected are different from each other. Although the expectation was given to the winning of the special role according to the stopping mode of the small role, the stopping mode at the time of winning the single role of the small role is different from the stopping mode at the time of simultaneous winning of the small role and the special role. There is a problem that it can be determined from the player whether or not the special combination is won according to the mode, and the expectation is lost. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected at the stop operation position where the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed, control is performed to align the combination of orange roles on the winning line.

  Among them, when orange, bonus (A) + orange are won, out of the stop operation positions where the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of oranges is only applied to the winning lines L1 and L2. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be aligned and at a stop operation position that can be aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L6, control for aligning the combination of orange roles to the winning lines L1 and L2 is performed. The combination of the orange combination can be aligned only with the winning lines L3 and L4, and the combination of the orange combination is only performed when the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be aligned with the winning lines L1 and L2. , Control to align with L4.

  On the other hand, when orange + 1 (1) and bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, the combination of orange combinations can be drawn into the winning line. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination can be aligned only with the winning lines L3 and L4 and the stop operation position where the combination can be aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L6, the orange It is possible to control the combination of the winning combination to the winning lines L3 and L4, the orange combination can be aligned only to the winning lines L1 and L2, and the stop operation at the stop operation position that cannot be aligned to the winning lines L3 and L4. Control is performed so that the combination of the orange combination is aligned with the winning lines L1 and L2 only when the is made.

  That is, when orange and bonus (A) + orange are selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of oranges is selected as the winning line L3, Priority is given to the winning lines L1 and L2 over L4, and orange + 1 (1) and bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of orange is drawn into the winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the winning combination can be performed, a control for aligning the combination of orange roles with priority to the winning lines L3 and L4 over the winning lines L1 and L2 is performed.

  Similarly, when the plum, bonus (B) + plum is selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the plums can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of the plums is selected as the winning line L3, The winning line L1 and L2 are controlled in preference to L4, and Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are selected, and the combination of plums is drawn into the winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the winning combination can be performed, control is performed so that the combination of plums is preferentially aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4 over the winning lines L1 and L2.

  With such a configuration, when orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum, bonus (B) + plum are selected, there is a possibility that the combination of orange combination or plum combination will be aligned on the winning lines L1, L2. If orange is +1 (1), bonus (A) + orange +1 (1), plum +1 (2), bonus (B) + plum +1 (2) is won There is a high possibility that a combination of winning combination or plum winning combination is aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4. In other words, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, Orange and Plum win, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 ( 1) Plum + 1 piece (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 piece (2), winning line where the combination of orange or plum combination is easy to match when orange and plum wins Is different.

  After the reel control as described above is performed, in the internal lottery, the bonus (A) in the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange + orange is higher than the ratio of the winning probability of orange + 1. (1) Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) winning probability ratio of orange and bonus (1) A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1). Similarly, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) than the ratio of Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum winning probability to the total value of Plum winning probability Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + with the probability that the ratio of the winning probability of bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) in the total value of winning probability will be higher Plot + 1 (2) lottery.

  As a result, when Orange and 1 sheet (1) are elected at the same time, both Orange and 1 sheet (1) are won at the same time as Bonus (A). The percentage increases, and when the Plum and one (2) are won at the same time, the Plum and one (2) are won at the same time as the bonus (B). Therefore, the winning line of the combination of the orange role or the plum role is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4. Can change expectations.

  Furthermore, even if the winning line with the combination of orange role or plum role is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4, it is suggested that the special role may be won. However, it is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from a winning line with a combination of roles. The expectation of the person will not be lost.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, and stops at the stop operation position where the combination of Orange or Plum can be drawn into the winning line. When an operation is performed, control is performed so that the combination of orange combination or plum combination is aligned with the winning lines L1 and L2 at a higher rate than the winning lines L3 and L4, and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 Sheet (1), Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are selected and stop at the stop operation position where the combination of orange or plum can be drawn into the winning line When an operation is performed, control is performed to align the combination of orange combination or plum combination with the winning lines L3 and L4 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1 and L2. However, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum are selected and stop at the stop operation position where the combination of Orange or Plum can be drawn into the winning line. When an operation is performed, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of orange combination or plum combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of orange combination or plum combination is applied only to the winning lines L1 and L2. Controls aligning, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are elected and play the role of Orange Or, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where a combination of plums can be drawn into the winning line, a combination of oranges or plums is won. It may perform control to align only in L3, L4.

  In this example, in the internal lottery, the ratio of the winning probability of bonus (A) + orange to the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (the ratio of the winning probability of Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) in the winning value of Orange + 1 (1) is different) 1) Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) lottery, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange has been won, at the stop operation position where the combination of orange can be drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line. By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned is different from when the stop operation is performed at the active stop operation position, the player's winning for the special role is determined by the difference in the winning line with the combination of orange roles The degree of expectation can be changed, but in the internal lottery, the bonus (A) + orange + 1 (in the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) ( The ratio of the winning probability of 1) and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange winning probability ratio of the total value of the bonus (A) + orange winning probability is different from the orange, Lottery of bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), orange, bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination can be drawn into the winning line, and Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange is selected. By controlling so that the winning line that is preferentially aligned differs between when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the winning combination can be drawn into the winning line, the winning line with the orange combined combination is controlled. Depending on the difference, the player's expectation for winning the special role may be changed. The same applies to the case of plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2).

  (13-3) In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific combination that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when no combination is won. When a specific combination is missed, if there is no winning combination, there will be a change in the reel stop mode by stopping a specific stop mode that will not stop. There is a problem that there is only one type of specific stop mode that stops when the specific combination is missed by performing the stop operation at the same timing, and the stop mode of the reel becomes monotonous. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  When the orange and bonus (A) + orange are selected, and the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination cannot be drawn into the winning line, the predetermined chance except for the orange combination or the plum combination is won. Priority is given to the winning lines L1 and L2 over the lines L3 and L4, and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of orange roles is won When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be drawn into the line, control is performed so that the chance lines are preferentially aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4 over the winning lines L1 and L2.

  Similarly, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of plums cannot be drawn into the winning line, a chance is won from the winning lines L3 and L4. Priority is given to the lines L1 and L2, and a control operation that prevents the combination of plums from being drawn into the winning line is selected as plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) When the stop operation is performed at the position, the control is performed so that the chance lines are preferentially aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4 over the winning lines L1 and L2.

  As a result, even if Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange is won, or Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) is won, If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of the orange combination will be aligned on the winning line, but if orange, bonus (A) + orange are won, In other words, if only orange out of orange (1) is elected alone and the orange is missed, chances are high that the chances are aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, orange + 1 (1), bonus ( A) If + Orange + 1 (1) is elected, that is, if both Orange and 1 (1) are elected at the same time and lose the orange, chances will be entered Likely to align the line L3, L4. Similarly, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, or when Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) is won, If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of plums will be aligned on the winning line, but if Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is selected, That is, if only one of the plums (1) (2) wins alone and misses the plum, chances are high that the winning lines will be aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and the plum + 1 (2), bonus ( B) If + Plum + 1 (2) is won, that is, if both Plum and 1 (2) are won at the same time and the Plum is missed, chances can be aligned on the winning lines L3 and L4 High .

  As a result, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won and Orange and Plum are missed, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1 ), Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are won and the orange and plums are missed. It is possible to diversify the manner in which the reels are stopped at the time.

  The chances are that Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum was won and Orange and Plum were missed, Orange +1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange +1 (1) Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are controlled to be aligned to any of the winning lines on condition that the orange and plum are missed. When a combination or combination of combinations is not won, chances are not matched to any winning line. For this reason, the possibility of winning a special role is surely suggested by having chance chances on any of the winning lines.

  In this example, as described above, the bonus (A) when the orange and one sheet (1) are won at the same time is more than the case where the orange and one sheet (1) are won alone. ) At the same time, the percentage of winning prizes will increase, and a bonus will be awarded when a plum and one piece (2) of the plum and one piece (2) are won at the same time, rather than when the plum is won alone. B) Since the winning percentage will increase at the same time, the game for winning the special role depends on whether the winning line with the chance is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4. Can change the expectation of a person.

  Furthermore, even if the winning line with the chance line is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4, it is suggested that the special role may be won, but the chance line is It is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from the line of winning lines, and the player's expectation that a special role has been won, regardless of the winning line. A feeling is not spoiled.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won and Orange and Plum are lost, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 The winning line where the chances are easy to match will be changed when winning (1), plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) and orange and plum are missed. However, chances 1 and 2 with different display modes are determined, and orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum, bonus (B) + plum is won and orange +1 is lost and orange +1 Sheet (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 sheet (1), Plum + 1 sheet (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 sheet (2) are selected and Orange and Plum are removed. And if spilled, in appearance and easy chance eyes of types she may be changed.

  In this example, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is elected and Orange and Plum are missed, the chance is won at a higher rate than the winning lines L3 and L4. Control to align with lines L1 and L2, and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) When the orange and plum are missed, the control is performed so that the chances are aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1 and L2, but the orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum If the bonus (B) + plum is won and the orange or plum is missed, control is performed to align the chances to only the winning lines L1 and L2. +1 sheet (1), Bonus (A) + Orange +1 sheet (1), Plum +1 sheet (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 sheet (2) are elected and Orange and Plum are lost You may make it perform the control which aligns a chance line only to the winning lines L3 and L4.

  In addition, in this example, when orange and one sheet (1) are elected at the same time, it is won at the same time as bonus (A) than when orange and one sheet (1) are elected alone. The ratio of the winning combination is higher when the Plum and one piece (2) are won at the same time than the case where the Plum and one piece (2) are won alone. By increasing the winning percentage, the player's expectation for winning the special role depends on whether the winning line with the chances is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4. For example, when the chances are aligned with any of the winning lines, the process proceeds to RT described later, and when the chances are aligned with the winning lines L1 and L2, the first Move to RT When the game line is aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4, the second RT is different from the first RT in terms of the advantage (RT termination condition, winning probability of the re-gamer, presence / absence notification of the winning combination or notification ratio) It is also possible to adopt a configuration for shifting to RT, and by adopting such a configuration, when orange or plum is missed, the display mode of the reels is not only diversified, but the display mode that the same chance eyes are aligned on the winning line Even so, when orange and plum are elected alone, RT and orange + 1 (1) and plum + 1 (2) are likely to be elected when orange and plum are missed. In this case, the advantage can be changed between orange and RT which may shift when a plum is dropped.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, it may be configured to be controlled in the preparation mode or RT depending on whether it is a big bonus or a regular bonus. For example, when the big bonus (1) is finished, it is controlled so as to be more advantageous than the preparation mode controlled when the big bonus (2) is finished (for example, the winning rate of falling replay is low). It may be configured. Also, the RT controlled from the preparation mode controlled when the big bonus (1) ends is more advantageous than the RT controlled from the preparation mode controlled when the big bonus (2) ends (for example, It may be configured such that the winning ratio of replay is controlled. In this case, the combination of bonuses that trigger the control to the preparation mode or RT may be composed of different symbols for each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. For example, the big bonus (1) may be “red 7-grape-melon”, the big bonus (2) may be “grape-white 7-BAR”, and the regular bonus may be “melon-strawberry-watermelon”. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which bonus is won when a bonus is won. As a result, it can be difficult to understand which type of RT is controlled.

  Further, in such a configuration, the bonus effect may be such that the player cannot specify the type of bonus being controlled by performing the same content regardless of the type of bonus. This makes it difficult for the player to identify the type of bonus from the combination of symbols at the end of the game, and makes it difficult for the player to notice which type of bonus is being controlled. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the preparation mode and RT type to be controlled after the bonus ends.

  Further, in the case of such a configuration, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is made larger than the area of the see-through window 3 of the variable display device 2 and close to the height of the player's line of sight. You may install in the position which is easier to visually recognize than the window 3. FIG. Then, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, a virtual reel for scrolling the symbols in accordance with the display state of the variable display device 2 is displayed, and the effect symbols corresponding to the display results of the variable display device 2 are displayed in a variable manner. You may comprise so that it may display on the winning line of the virtual reel to make. Specifically, when a combination of grapes is derived in the variable display device 2, “grape-grape-grape” may be stopped and displayed on the winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51. As a result, the player can proceed with the game by viewing the variable reels 2 by displaying the virtual reels. In such a slot machine, when any of the bonuses that trigger the above-described preparation mode or RT control is won, the winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed regardless of the type of bonus that has been won. You may comprise so that common "7-7-7" may be stopped and displayed. This makes it difficult for a player who visually recognizes the liquid crystal display 51 to proceed with the game and to determine which type of bonus has been won. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which kind of preparation mode or RT is controlled.

  In addition, the RT which is advantageous to the player in the above-described embodiment is terminated by using a predetermined number of games or winning a big bonus or a regular bonus (by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus) You may comprise so that it may not complete | finish. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of loss by ending RT because the big bonus or regular bonus has been won before the predetermined number of games is consumed. . In addition, since the bonus winning flag is carried over after the next game until winning, it is possible to win the bonus won during the RT after reaching the predetermined number of games. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus at the end of RT.

  The RT replay winning probability described above is an RT that is likely to receive fewer medals, that is, an RT in which the expected number of medals per game is smaller than the number of medals used to set the number of bets. It may be set as follows. The expected value of the number of medals acquired per game is, for example, the number of medals acquired when a game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times, 100,000 times) in a certain gaming state. The value (theoretical value) divided by the number of times the number of winning is subtracted. In the case of such a configuration, when it is further controlled by the AT and becomes ART, the number of medals to be won per game is awarded by not winning the winning small role according to the navigation effect. The expected value may be made larger than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, and the number of medals owned by the player may be increased.

  (15) As an RT termination condition in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which a bonus is won and a fall replay is established. However, the end condition of RT is not limited to this, and may be configured to be satisfied by further digesting the prescribed number of games and winning in a predetermined end lottery. In addition, an example in which the preparation mode end condition is established by bonus winning, falling replay winning, special stoppage, etc. has been described. However, the end condition of the preparation mode is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be further established by winning in a specified number of games and a predetermined end lottery. As a result, the types of timings at which the RT or the preparation mode ends can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (16) In the above embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting the number of bets and giving game value associated with winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  (17) In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting the bet number using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using a game ball. Or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in game balls, and a take-in ball that detects game balls taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set the number of bets using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning occurs.

  (18) In FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 of the above-described embodiment, as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period, (a) the AT is determined on the condition that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more. An example of the ratio determined to be controlled by the AT in the slot machine to be controlled by is illustrated. However, as notification conditions related to whether or not to start the notification period, (b) Control by the AT on the condition that the number of games digested in the non-AT in the preparation mode or RT has reached a predetermined number of reached games The rate at which the number of games reached until the start of AT control in the slot machine to be played is determined. It may be a ratio that determines the number of times to reach the AT until the control to the AT is started in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on the condition that it has been reached.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the case of (a) above, by using a table that determines that AT is controlled at a higher rate as the total number of granted points is larger (the degree of advantage for the player is higher), the player An example of AT lottery so as to be advantageous to the above has been described. However, in the case of (b) above, similarly, a table in which the winning rate is set so that the higher the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the smaller the number of reached games is determined at a higher rate. It may be configured to perform an AT lottery so as to be advantageous for the player. Similarly, in the case of (c), a table is used in which the winning rate is set so that the greater the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the smaller the number of arrivals is determined at a higher rate. Thus, the AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  In FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 of the above-described embodiment, as the notification condition related to the period controlled in the notification period, (D) the number of games digested in AT reaches the number of finished games according to the number of navigation stock acquired. The ratio of determining the number of navigation stocks in the slot machine that ends the control to the AT on the condition that it has been, that is, the ratio of determining the number of end games is illustrated. However, as a notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period, (e) a predetermined end lottery is executed in accordance with the end probability determined in advance in the AT, and the control to the AT is performed on the condition that the end lottery is won The ratio at which the end probability is determined in the slot machine that finishes, (f) The slot machine that finishes the control to the AT on condition that the number of times that the navigation effect has been executed by winning the fall replay at the AT has reached the specified number The ratio for determining the prescribed number of times may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the case of (d) above, the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the higher the number of navigation stocks, that is, the higher the number of finished games is determined at a higher rate. An example in which AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by using the table to be described has been described. However, in the case of the above (e), similarly, a table in which the winning rate is set so that the higher the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player) is, the higher the lower end probability is determined. Thus, the AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player. Similarly, in the case of (f), a table is used in which the winning rate is set so that the greater the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the higher the specified number of times is determined. Thus, the AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  The notification conditions include, for example, a ratio for determining a winning probability in a slot machine that draws whether or not a navigation effect is to be executed at the time of winning a fall replay at (ki) AT, and executes a navigation effect when winning. It may be. Similarly, in the case of (ki) above, by using a table in which the winning rate is set so that the higher the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the higher the winning probability is determined at a higher rate. , AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the notification condition may be any of the above (A) to (K), or may be selectively combined among the above (A) to (K). Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (A) to (K) or a combination of (A) to (K), the same effect as the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  (19) As shown in (18) above, at least (a) the number of games digested in the non-AT in the preparation mode or RT as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period has been determined in advance Percentage of determining the number of games reached until the start of AT control in a slot machine controlled by AT on condition that the number of games has been reached, (c) Winning a fall replay won in non-AT in preparation mode or RT In a slot machine that adopts a ratio for determining the number of times to reach control at the AT in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on the condition that the number of times of avoidance that has been avoided has reached the determined number of arrivals, etc. In the preparation mode until controlled during the notification period or in non-AT in RT A means for performing a navigation effect that enables identification of the type of replay that has been won at the time of winning, and a control of the replay that has been won at the time of winning the fall replay on condition that it is a period that can be notified outside the period. And a means for executing a navigation effect that makes it possible to specify the type. In this case, as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period, it is further provided that the number of games digested in the non-period notification possible period has reached a predetermined number of out-of-period end games. As a ratio of determining the end-of-period end game in the slot machine that ends the control to the out-of-period notification possible period, (k) a predetermined out-of-period end lottery according to a predetermined out-of-period end probability in the out-of-period notification possible period The ratio of determining the out-of-period end probability in the slot machine that finishes the control to the out-of-period notification possible period on condition that the lottery is won in the out-of-period end lottery. The control for the out-of-period notification period is terminated on condition that the number of times that the replay is won and the navigation effect is executed reaches the prescribed number of times outside the period. Percentage that determines periods outside predetermined number of times in the slot machine, or the like may be used.

  In the case of (c) above, the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the more advantageous for the player by using a table that determines a higher number of out-of-period end games. As described above, an AT lottery including a lottery related to an out-of-period notification possible period may be configured. In the case of (K), the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the more advantageous it is for the player by using a table for determining a lower out-of-period end probability at a higher rate. In addition, an AT lottery including a lottery related to an out-of-period notification possible period may be configured. In the case of the above (co), the period is set such that the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player) is, the more advantageous the player can be by using a table that determines the higher number of out-of-period prescribed times. You may comprise so that AT lottery including the lottery regarding an outside alerting | reporting period may be carried out.

  In addition, for example, the notification condition is determined by lottery whether or not the navigation effect is executed at the time of winning the fall replay in the (sa) outside notification possible period, and the winning probability is determined in the slot machine that executes the navigation effect when winning. It may be the ratio to do. Similarly, in the case of (sa), the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the more advantageous to the player by using a table for determining a higher winning probability at a higher rate. You may comprise so that AT lottery including the lottery regarding the period which can be notified outside a period is included.

  In addition, the notification conditions in the slot machine may be any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa), and the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku). It may be one that is selectively combined among (s). Even if the notification condition is any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa) or selectively combined, other than the notification period in the period controlled to the advantageous state Since the notification conditions are set so as to be more advantageous to the player than in the normal state, the player can proceed with the game with expectation and improve the interest of the game. it can.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28 (d) and the like, the lottery condition is satisfied and the lottery condition is satisfied every time when 5 games are consumed as a predetermined period when the AT is non-AT. An example in which the 2AT lottery is performed has been described. However, the predetermined period is not limited to a period in which the game is consumed a predetermined number of times, but is a period until a specific winning combination (for example, melon) is won or won a predetermined number of times, a period until a predetermined number of times for a fall replay, and a predetermined time elapses. It may be a period of time. Thereby, when it is non-AT, a player can be made to pay attention to whether a predetermined period passes, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  (21) In FIG. 28 of the above-described embodiment, as a notification condition related to whether or not to start a notification period, (a) the AT is controlled on the condition that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more. The ratio of determining to control to AT in the slot machine is illustrated. However, as notification conditions related to whether or not to start the notification period, (b) Control by the AT on the condition that the number of games digested in the non-AT in the preparation mode or RT has reached a predetermined number of reached games The rate at which the number of games reached until the start of AT control in the slot machine to be played is determined. It may be a ratio that determines the number of times to reach the AT until the control to the AT is started in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on the condition that it has been reached.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the case of (a) above, in the non-preparation mode or non-ART, a table that determines to control AT at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state (FIG. 28 (a) The example in which the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by using the table of () and the table of (d)) has been described. However, in the case of (i) above, similarly, in the non-preparation mode or non-ART, the winning rate is set so that a smaller number of reached games are determined at a higher rate than in the normal game state. By using a table, an AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player. Similarly, in the case of (c), in the non-preparation mode or non-ART, a table in which the winning rate is set so that a smaller number of times of arrival is determined at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. By using the AT, an AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  In FIG. 28 of the above-described embodiment, as the notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period, (d) that the number of games digested in the AT has reached the number of end games according to the number of navigation stock acquired. As a condition, the ratio of determining the number of navigation stocks in the slot machine that ends the control to the AT, that is, the ratio of determining the number of finished games is illustrated. However, as a notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period, (e) a predetermined end lottery is executed in accordance with the end probability determined in advance in the AT, and the control to the AT is performed on the condition that the end lottery is won The ratio at which the end probability is determined in the slot machine that finishes, (f) The slot machine that finishes the control to the AT on condition that the number of times that the navigation effect has been executed by winning the fall replay at the AT has reached the specified number The ratio for determining the prescribed number of times may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the case of (d) above, in the non-preparation mode or non-ART, a higher number of navigation stocks, that is, a higher number of finished games is higher than in the normal gaming state. A description will be given of an example in which an AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by using the table determined in step (see the table in FIG. 28A and the 30G digestion table and the bonus winning table in FIG. 28D). did. However, in the case of the above (e), similarly, in the non-preparation mode or the non-ART, a table in which the winning rate is set so that a lower end probability is determined at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. By using the AT, an AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player. Similarly, in the case of (f), in the non-preparation mode or non-ART, a table in which the winning rate is set so that a higher number of prescribed times is determined at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. By using the AT, an AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  The notification conditions include, for example, a ratio for determining a winning probability in a slot machine that draws whether or not a navigation effect is to be executed at the time of winning a fall replay at (ki) AT, and executes a navigation effect when winning. It may be. Similarly, in the case of (ki), in the non-preparation mode or non-ART, a table in which the winning rate is set so that a higher winning probability is determined at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state is used. Thus, the AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the notification condition may be any of the above (A) to (K), or may be selectively combined among the above (A) to (K). Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (A) to (K) or a combination of (A) to (K), the same effect as the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  (22) As shown in (21) above, at least (a) the number of games digested in the non-AT in the preparation mode or RT is reached as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period. Percentage of determining the number of games reached until the start of AT control in a slot machine controlled by AT on condition that the number of games has been reached, (c) Winning a fall replay won in non-AT in preparation mode or RT In a slot machine that adopts a ratio for determining the number of times to reach control at the AT in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on the condition that the number of times of avoidance that has been avoided has reached the determined number of arrivals, etc. In the preparation mode until controlled during the notification period or in non-AT in RT A means for performing a navigation effect that enables identification of the type of replay that has been won at the time of winning, and a control of the replay that has been won at the time of winning the fall replay on condition that it is a period that can be notified outside the period. And a means for executing a navigation effect that makes it possible to specify the type. In this case, as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period, it is further provided that the number of games digested in the non-period notification possible period has reached a predetermined number of out-of-period end games. As a ratio of determining the end-of-period end game in the slot machine that ends the control to the out-of-period notification possible period, (k) a predetermined out-of-period end lottery according to a predetermined out-of-period end probability in the out-of-period notification possible period The ratio of determining the out-of-period end probability in the slot machine that finishes the control to the out-of-period notification possible period on condition that the lottery is won in the out-of-period end lottery. The control for the out-of-period notification period is terminated on condition that the number of times that the replay is won and the navigation effect is executed reaches the prescribed number of times outside the period. Percentage that determines periods outside predetermined number of times in the slot machine, or the like may be used.

  In the case of (c) above, in the non-preparation mode or non-ART, it is advantageous for the player by using a table that determines a higher number of out-of-period end games at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. It may be configured to perform an AT lottery including a lottery related to an out-of-period notification possible period. Also, in the case of (1) above, in the non-preparation mode or non-ART, it is advantageous for the player by using a table that determines a lower out-of-period end probability at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. As such, the AT lottery including the lottery related to the out-of-period notification possible period may be configured. In the case of (iii) above, in the non-preparation mode or non-ART, it is advantageous for the player by using a table that determines a higher number of out-of-period prescribed times at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. In addition, an AT lottery including a lottery related to an out-of-period notification possible period may be configured.

  In addition, for example, the notification condition is determined by lottery whether or not the navigation effect is executed at the time of winning the fall replay in the (sa) outside notification possible period, and the winning probability is determined in the slot machine that executes the navigation effect when winning. It may be the ratio to do. Similarly, in the case of (S), in the non-preparation mode or non-ART, it is advantageous for the player by using a table for determining a higher winning probability at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. As described above, an AT lottery including a lottery related to an out-of-period notification possible period may be configured.

  In addition, the notification conditions in the slot machine may be any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa), and the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku). It may be one that is selectively combined among (s). Even if the notification condition is any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa) or selectively combined, other than the notification period in the period controlled to the advantageous state Since the notification conditions are set so as to be more advantageous to the player than in the normal state, the player can proceed with the game with expectation and improve the interest of the game. it can.

  (23) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a main CPU, 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 51 liquid crystal Display, 90 stage control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a sub CPU, 91b ROM, 91c
RAM, 92 display control circuit, 141 VDP, 142 CGROM, 155 temporary storage memory, 156 frame buffer memory.

Claims (1)

A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
After displaying the variable display unit in a variable manner, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result,
A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow a prize to be generated;
Controlling the execution of games in a plurality of types of gaming states including a normal gaming state, an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a preparation gaming state until control to the advantageous gaming state, An advantageous amount that can be controlled to the advantageous gaming state is set as a termination condition of the advantageous gaming state, and a gaming state control means that consumes the advantageous amount and terminates the advantageous gaming state by satisfying the termination condition;
In the preparatory gaming state, when at least one of the transition conditions to the advantageous gaming state is satisfied, the advantageous amount can be increased by satisfying the specific condition, and the advantageous amount is increased. and end condition changing means for changing the set end condition of the advantageous gaming state by causing,
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
An operation procedure information notifying unit capable of notifying operation procedure information capable of specifying an operation procedure according to the predetermined determination result when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes a predetermined determination result in the preparatory gaming state ; Prepared,
The pre-determining means has a different determination mode depending on which one of the normal gaming state, the advantageous gaming state, and the preparatory gaming state is controlled, and the gaming value is not used by the player. Decide whether to allow a replay win to set the number of bets available for the next game,
The specific condition is a slot machine that is established when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific determination result.

Images